Owner`s Manual - GM Owner Center

Owner`s Manual - GM Owner Center
2004 HUMMER H2 Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-7
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-16
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-38
Air Bag System
....................................... 1-61
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-73
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-7
Windows ................................................. 2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-18
Mirrors .................................................... 2-34
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-40
HomeLink® Transmitter
............................. 2-42
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-45
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-50
Vehicle Personalization
............................. 2-51
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-2
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-19
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-26
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-44
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-62
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-65
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-48
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-50
Front Axle
............................................... 5-51
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-59
Tires
...................................................... 5-60
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-92
Vehicle Identification
............................... 5-101
Electrical System
.................................... 5-101
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-111
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10
Index ................................................................ 1
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, HUMMER
and the name HUMMER is a registered trademark
and H2 is a trademark of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, subsitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for HUMMER whenever it appears
in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.
Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French language copy of this manual
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If
you do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you will find
that pictures and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in
the manual, and the page number where you will find it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. S2427 A First Edition
ii
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 08/01/03
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the
warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
are shown along with the text describing the operation
or information relating to a specific component, control,
message, gage or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the
notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the
damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols you may find on your vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-2
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-3
Heated Seats .................................................1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-5
Head Restraints .............................................1-6
Rear Seats .......................................................1-7
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-7
Heated Seats .................................................1-8
60/40 Split Bench Seat ...................................1-8
Third Row Seats ...........................................1-10
Safety Belts ...................................................1-16
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-16
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-21
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-21
Driver Position ..............................................1-22
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-29
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-30
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-30
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults .......................................1-34
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-37
Child Restraints .............................................1-38
Older Children ..............................................1-38
Infants and Young Children ............................1-40
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-44
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-47
Top Strap ....................................................1-48
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-49
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-50
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System .........................................1-52
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ...................................................1-53
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ............................................1-55
Air Bag System ..............................................1-61
Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-63
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-65
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-65
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-65
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? ...1-66
Air Bag Off Switch ........................................1-68
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-72
Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-73
Restraint System Check ..................................1-73
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-73
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash ......................................................1-74
1-1
Front Seats
Power Seats
Horizontal Control: This control adjusts the seat
cushion.
• Raise or lower the front of the seat by raising or
lowering the forward edge of the control. Raise
or lower the rear of the seat by raising or lowering
the rear edge of the control.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the
whole control toward the front or toward the rear
of the vehicle.
• Lower or raise the entire seat cushion by moving
the whole control up or down.
Vertical Control: This control adjusts the seatback.
Move the reclining front seatback rearward or forward by
moving the control toward the rear or toward the front
of the vehicle. This adjusts the angle of the seatback.
For more information on the reclining seatbacks,
see Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-5.
The power seat controls are located on the outboard
edge of the front seats.
1-2
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
Seat on page 2-51 for more information.
Power Lumbar
Your vehicle’s seats may be equipped with power
lumbar.
You can increase or
decrease lumbar support
in an area of the lower
seatback with this control,
located on the outboard
sides of the front seat(s).
To increase support, press and hold the front of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the rear of
the control. Let go of the control when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
You can also reshape the side wing area of the lower
seatback for more lateral support.
To increase support, press and hold the top of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the bottom
of the control. Let go of the control when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
Seat on page 2-51 for more information.
1-3
Heated Seats
Your vehicle may have
heated front seats. The
buttons used to control this
feature are located on the
front doors. The engine
must be running for the
heated seat feature
to work.
The low setting warms the seatback and cushion until
the seat temperature is near body temperature. The
medium and high settings heat the seatback and seat
cushion to a slightly higher temperature. You will be able
to feel heat in about two minutes.
To heat only the seatback, press the vertical button with
the heated seatback symbol. An indicator light on the
seatback button will glow to designate that only the
seatback is being heated. Additional presses of
the seatback button will cycle through the heat levels for
the seatback only. Press the horizontal button again
to heat the whole seat.
The heated front seats will shut off automatically when
the ignition is turned off.
To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button with
the heated seat symbol. Press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings of high, medium and
low and to turn the heated seat off. Indicator lights
will glow to designate the level of heat selected,
three for high, two for medium, and one for low.
1-4
Reclining Seatbacks
Your vehicle’s front seatbacks have a recline feature
which is described earlier. See Power Seats on
page 1-2.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-5
Head Restraints
Pull straight up on the head restraint to raise it and
push it down to lower it.
The front head restraints can also be tilted forward in
addition to being slid up or down. To tilt either of
the front head restraints do the following:
Pull the head restraint toward you until you hear a click.
Then let go. The head restraint will stay in this position
unless you pull it forward more until another click is
heard. There are four positions available: initial position,
first click, second click, and third click. After the third
position (three clicks) is reached, pulling the head
restraint farther will release it back to the normal upright
position.
The rear head restraints can be slid up or down just as
the front head restraints, but they do not tilt.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-6
Rear Seats
Be sure to return the seat to the upright position when
finished. Pull forward and push rearward on the seat
to make sure it is locked in place.
Rear Seat Operation
Entering or Exiting the Third Row
Seats
To enter or exit the third row seat (if equipped) you
must fold the second row seat down following the
instructions later in this section. See “Folding the
Seatbacks” under 60/40 Split Bench Seat on page 1-8.
If you are exiting the third row seat with no assistance,
do the following:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
1. Reach over the second
row seat and pull up on
the strap loop. Then
pull the seat cushion up
and push it forward.
2. Next, push the seatback forward until it is flat with
the floor.
1-7
Folding the Seatbacks
Heated Seats
If your vehicle has this
feature, the buttons used
to control this feature
are located on the back of
the center console. The
engine must be running for
the heated seat feature
to work.
The seatbacks are equipped with rearward folding head
restraints. When the seatback is being folded down,
the head restraint will automatically fold rearward.
To fold the rear seat, do the following:
1. Make sure that nothing is under or in front of
the seat.
2. Pull up on the strap
loop located at the rear
of the seat cushion
and pull the seat
cushion up and fold it
forward.
To heat the seat, press the button to cycle through the
temperature settings of high and low. Press the button a
third time to turn the feature off. An indicator light will glow
for each heat setting when the feature is operating.
The heated rear seats will shut off automatically when
the ignition is turned off.
60/40 Split Bench Seat
The 60/40 split bench seats can be folded to give you
more cargo space.
1-8
3. Pull the seatback forward and fold it down until it
is flat.
If the seatback cannot fold flat because it interferes with
the cushion, try moving the front seat forward and/or
bringing the front seatback more upright.
Returning the Seats to an Upright
Position
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To return the seat(s) to the upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the seatback up and push it rearward all
the way.
2. Lower the seat cushion until it latches into position.
3. Pull forward on the seatback and up on the seat
cushion to make sure the seat is securely in
place.
4. Return the head restraints to the upright position.
5. Check to see that the safety belt buckles on
the driver’s side seat are accessible to the outboard
and center occupants and are not under the seat
cushions.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
1-9
Unfolding the Seatback
Third Row Seats
If your vehicle has a third row seat, the seatback can be
folded and the entire seat tilted or removed from the
vehicle.
Folding the Seatback
To fold the seatback, do the following:
1. Pull up on the release
lever, labeled 1,
located on the rear of
the seatback, and
push the seatback
forward.
1-10
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To return the seatback to the passenger position, do the
following:
1. Pull up on the release
lever labeled 1 and
then pull up on
the seatback until the
seatback locks into
the upright position.
2. Push forward on the seatback to make sure it is
locked into position.
Tilting the Seat
1. Fold the seatback forward using the instructions
listed previously.
2. Unlatch the seat from
the floor by pulling up
on the lever labeled 2,
located on the rear
of the seat.
3. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor and push it
forward until it locks into place. You will not be able
to unlatch the seat from the floor unless the
seatback is folded down.
The seat will now remain locked in the upright position.
1-11
Returning the Seat to an Upright
Position
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Pull the lever labeled 3 toward you.
2. While still holding lever 3 toward you, grasp the top
of the seat and pull it toward you slightly.
3. Let go of lever 3 and pull the seat completely down.
4. Push down on the seat firmly. Try pulling it up to
be sure it is locked into place.
1-12
5. Pull up on the release
lever labeled 1 and
then pull up on
the seatback until the
seatback locks into
the upright position.
Removing the Seat
To remove the seat, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Fold the seatback
forward onto the seat
cushion by using
the lever labeled 1.
The seat cannot
be removed unless the
seatback is folded.
1-13
3. To unlatch the rear of
the seat from the floor,
pull up on the release
lever labeled 2, at
the rear of the seat,
and lift the rear of
the seat up from the
floor.
4. Squeeze the release handle while pulling the
seat out.
5. While holding the rear of the seat up, roll the seat
out of the vehicle.
1-14
Replacing the Seat
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To replace the seat, do the following:
{CAUTION:
A seat that isn’t locked into place properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
1. While holding the rear of the seat up, slide the front
wheels into the slots on the floor. The front latches
should lock into place. If the latches do not lock,
try tilting the rear of the seat upwards.
1-15
2. Once the latches are
engaged, let the seat
drop into place.
Release the lever
labeled 1 and pull the
seatback up to
return it to its upright
position.
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
3. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place. The seatback cannot be raised to the
upright position unless the seat is secured to
the floor.
1-16
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
{CAUTION:
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-28.
1-17
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on
wheels.
1-18
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-19
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-20
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be – whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts – not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the
use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that
has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get
the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident – even one that isn’t your fault – you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-38
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-40. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
1-21
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index
1-22
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-37.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-23
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
1-24
The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give
nearly as much protection this way.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-25
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be
sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A:
1-26
The belt is over an armrest.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-27
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A:
1-28
The belt is twisted across the body.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-29
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Rear Seat Passengers
Right Front Passenger Position
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-22.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt – except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way
and start again.
1-30
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here
is how to wear one properly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-37.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
1-31
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-32
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you
slid under it, the belt would apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash. The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt
very quickly out of the retractor.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the
buckle.
1-33
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
Comfort guides are provided for each outside passenger
in the second row seat and one guide for the single
third row seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for
children who have outgrown child restraints and
booster seats and for smaller adults, the comfort guides
may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here is how
to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:
Second Row Seat
1. For the second row, remove the guide from its
storage clip on the trim panel near the side of
the seatback.
1-34
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
Third Row Seat
For the third row, remove the guide from its storage
clip on the side of the seatback.
1-35
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The guide must be on top of the belt.
1-36
Second Row Seat
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. For the second row, slide the guide onto its
storage clip on the trim panel near the side of the
seatback. For the third row, slide the guide onto its
storage clip on the side of the seatback. Make sure you
remove the comfort guide from the belt before you
fold a rear seat down.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Third Row Seat
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-30.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your
vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
1-37
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q:
A:
What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-38
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Q:
A:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
Also, see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults on page 1-34. If the child
is sitting in the center position, move the child
toward the safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure
that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,
so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have
the restraint that belts provide.
1-39
CAUTION:
(Continued)
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
CAUTION:
1-40
(Continued)
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold
it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-41
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A:
1-42
Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight,
height, and age but also whether or not the
restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle
in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that’s
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
1-43
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-44
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-45
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-46
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
If you need to secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat, there is a switch on the instrument
panel that you can use to turn off the passenger’s
air bag. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-68 and
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat
Position on page 1-55, for more on this including
important safety information.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger seat unless the air bag is off. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag. Be
sure to turn off the air bag before using a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat
position.
Even though the air bag off switch is designed
to turn off the passenger’s air bag, no system
is fail safe, and no one can guarantee that an
air bag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
General Motors recommends that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the air bag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-47
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, don’t use the restraint unless it is anchored
properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
1-48
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed. Raise the head
restraint and route the top strap under it.
Top Strap Anchor Location
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury to
people and damage to your vehicle, attach only
one child restraint per bracket.
A child restraint with a top strap should only be used in
the second or third row. Don’t use a child restraint
with a top strap in the front seat because there’s no
place to anchor the top strap.
An anchor loop bracket for a top strap is located at the
bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating
position in the second row and in the outboard
passenger position in the third row.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to
secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top strap
when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Second Row Seats
1-49
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Third Row Seat
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find
anchors (A) in the center and right side passenger
second row seating positions.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors (A, B) and child
restraint attachements to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure
a top tether strap (C).
1-50
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
1-51
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each seating position with the
LATCH system has a visible metal anchorage point in
the seat where the seatback meets the seat cushion.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-50.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-48.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.
1-52
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-50. See Top Strap
on page 1-48 if the child restraint has one.
1-53
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-54
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-55
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-50. See Top Strap
on page 1-48 if your child restraint has one.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. There
is a switch on the instrument panel that you can use
to turn off the right front passenger’s air bag when you
need to secure a child restraint at the right front
passenger’s position. See Air Bag Off Switch on
page 1-68 for more on this, including important safety
information.
United States
1-56
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag. Be
sure to turn off the air bag before using a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat
position.
Canada
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat unless the air bag is off. Here is why:
Even though the air bag off switch is designed
to turn off the passenger’s air bag, no system
is fail safe, and no one can guarantee that an
air bag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
General Motors recommends that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the air bag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-57
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the air bag, it means
that something may be wrong with the air bag
system. The right front passenger’s air bag
could inflate even though the switch is off. If
this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a member
of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right
front passenger’s position (for example, don’t
secure a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front seat ) until you have your vehicle serviced.
See “Air Bag Off Switch.”
1-58
You will be using a lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s air bag.
See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-68. If your child
restraint is forward-facing, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the restraint in this
seat. See “Seats” in the Index. If you need to use
a rear-facing child restraint in this seat, make
sure the air bag is off once the child restraint has
been installed.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-59
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
If you had turned the air bag off with the switch,
remember to be sure to use the air bag off switch to turn
on the right front passenger’s air bag when you remove
the child restraint from the vehicle unless the person who
will be sitting there is a member of the passenger air bag
risk group. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-68.
{CAUTION:
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-60
If the right front passenger’s air bag is turned
off for a person who isn’t in a risk group
identified by the national government, that
person won’t have the extra protection of an air
bag. In a crash, the air bag wouldn’t be able to
inflate and help protect the person sitting there.
Don’t turn off the passenger’s air bag unless the
person sitting there is in a risk group. See ″Air
Bag Off Switch″ in the Index for more on this,
including important safety information.
Air Bag System
This part explains the air bag system.
Your vehicle has air bags – one air bag for the driver
and another air bag for the right front passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these
air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work
with safety belts, but do not replace them.
Airbags are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or
in many side crashes. And, for some
unrestrained occupants, air bags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than more
forceful air bags have provided in the past.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an air
bag for that person.
1-61
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an
inflating air bag, as you would be if you were
leaning forward, it could seriously injure you.
Safety belts help keep you in position before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with air bags. The driver should sit
as far back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults,
butnot for young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see Older Children on page 1-38 and Infants
and Young Children on page 1-40.
1-62
There is a air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the air bag symbol.
Where Are the Air Bags?
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-28
for more information.
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
1-63
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering.
The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
1-64
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal, or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
'threshold level'.
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag,
and related hardware are all part of the air bag
modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument
panel in front of the right front passenger.
If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t
move or deform, the threshold level is about 9 to 17 mph
(14 to 27 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however,
with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat
above or below this range. If your vehicle strikes
something that will move or deform, such as a parked
car, the threshold level will be higher. The air bag is not
designed to inflate in rollovers, rear impacts, or in
many side impacts because inflation would not help the
occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact
and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
The air bag system is designed to work properly under
a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough
terrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See Off-Road
Driving on page 4-17 for more tips on off-road driving.
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the
protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
But air bags would not help you in many types of
collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is
not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be
regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety
belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions.
1-65
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the air bag inflated.
Some components of the air bag module – the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the instrument panel
for the right front passenger’s bag – will be hot for a short
time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the
driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor
does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
1-66
{CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an air bag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the air
bags inflate (if battery power is available). You can lock
the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by
using the door lock and interior lamp controls.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After
they inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your
air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air
bag system won’t be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include air
bag modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information
about the air bag system. The module records
information about the readiness of the system, when
the system commands air bag inflation and
driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.
The module also records speed, engine rpm, brake
and throttle data.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
system. Improper service can mean that an air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s air bag, the bag
may not work properly. You may have to replace the
air bag module in the steering wheel or both the
air bag module and the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s air bag. Do not open or
break the air bag coverings.
1-67
Air Bag Off Switch
Your vehicle has a switch on the instrument panel that
you can use to turn off the right front passenger’s
air bag.
Canada
United States
1-68
This switch should only be turned to the off position if
the person in the right front passenger’s position is
a member of a passenger risk group identified by the
national government as follows:
Infant.An infant (less than 1 year old) must
ride in the front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• my vehicle has a rear seat too small to
accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according
to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Child age 1 to 12.A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear
seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12
sometimes must ride in the front because no space
is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or
• the child has a medical condition which, according
Medical Condition.A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his or
her physician:
• causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk
for the passenger; and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger air
bag in a crash greater than the potential harm
from turning off the air bag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or
windshield in a crash.
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s air bag is turned
off for a person who isn’t in a risk group
identified by the national government, that
person won’t have the extra protection of an air
bag. In a crash, the air bag wouldn’t be able to
inflate and help protect the person sitting there.
Don’t turn off the passenger’s air bag unless the
person sitting there is in a risk group.
to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
1-69
United States
Canada
To turn off the right front passenger’s air bag, insert
your ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the
switch to the off position.
The air bag off light will come on to let you know that
the right front passenger’s air bag is off. The right front
passenger’s air bag will remain off until you turn it
back on again, and the air bag off light will stay on to
remind you that the air bag is off.
1-70
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the air bag, it means
that something may be wrong with the air bag
system. The right front passenger’s air bag
could inflate even though the switch is off. If
this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a member
of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right
front passenger’s position (for example, don’t
secure a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front seat) until you have your vehicle serviced.
United States
1-71
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To
purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-11.
{CAUTION:
Canada
To turn the right front passenger’s air bag on again,
insert your ignition key into the switch, push in,
and move the switch to the on position.
For up to 2 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
air bag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close to
an air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow wires,
wires wrapped with yellow tape or yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the air
bag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-72
Adding Equipment to Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front of the
vehicle that could keep the air bags from
working properly?
A:
Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keep the air bag system
from working properly. Also, the air bag system
may not work properly if you relocate any of the air
bag sensors. If you have any questions about
this, you should contact Customer Assistance
before you modify your vehicle. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance
are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure on page 7-2.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-73
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
1-74
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH
system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-4
Doors and Locks .............................................2-7
Door Locks ....................................................2-7
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-8
Delayed Locking .............................................2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-11
Lockout Protection ........................................2-12
Liftgate ........................................................2-13
Windows ........................................................2-14
Power Windows ............................................2-15
Sun Visors ...................................................2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-16
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-16
Passlock® ....................................................2-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-18
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-18
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-19
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-20
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-21
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-22
All-Wheel Drive ............................................2-25
Parking Brake ..............................................2-29
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-30
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-32
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-32
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-33
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-33
Mirrors ...........................................................2-34
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature Display ..............2-34
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-37
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-38
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-39
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb
View Assist ..............................................2-39
OnStar® System .............................................2-40
HomeLink® Transmitter ...................................2-42
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter .........2-42
Storage Areas ................................................2-45
Glove Box ...................................................2-45
Center Overhead Console ..............................2-46
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-46
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-46
Rear Seat Armrest ........................................2-49
Sunroof .........................................................2-50
Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-51
Memory Seat ...............................................2-51
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-2
Your vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and all door locks.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able to
assist you with obtaining replacements.
In an emergency contact roadside assistance. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5.
If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle, you may be
able to have your doors unlocked automatically with the
OnStar® system if you have an active OnStar®
subscription. For more information see OnStar® System
on page 2-40.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-3
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
You can lock and unlock your doors from about 3 feet
(1 m) up to 100 feet (30 m) away using the remote
keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
K (Unlock): Press this
button once to unlock the
driver’s door. The
interior lamps will come
on. Pressing unlock again
within three seconds
will cause the remaining
doors to unlock.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
You can choose different feedback options for each
press of the unlock button. See DIC Operation
and Displays on page 3-44 for more information.
2-4
Q (Lock):
Press this button once to lock all of the
doors. Pressing lock again within three seconds
may cause the horn to chirp for lock confirmation. You
can choose different feedback options for each press
of the lock button. See DIC Operation and Displays on
page 3-44 for more information.
L (Panic): Press this button to sound the horn and
flash the headlamps and taillamps for up to 30 seconds.
Panic can be turned off by pressing the button again,
by waiting for 30 seconds, or by starting the vehicle.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
2-5
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter,
do the following:
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Resynchronize the transmitter. See
“Resynchronization” next.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
Resynchronization
Resynchronization may be necessary due to the
security method used by this system. The transmitter
does not send the same signal twice to the receiver. The
receiver will not respond to a signal that has been
sent previously. This prevents anyone from recording
and playing back the signal from the transmitter.
1. Insert a thin object, such as a coin, in the slot
between the covers of the transmitter housing
near the key ring hole. Remove the bottom
by twisting the coin.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a
three-volt CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+)
side up.
2-6
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your
vehicle and press and hold the lock and unlock
buttons on the transmitter at the same time for 15
seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
To unlock the door from the outside, use the keyless
entry system or the key.
To unlock or lock the door
from the inside, slide the
manual lever forward
or rearward.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-7
Cargo Area Door Lock Switch
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s armrests.
Your vehicle may have a
power lock switch in the
cargo area on the
passenger side of the
liftgate opening trim.
Q (Lock):
Remove the ignition key and press the lock
symbol to lock all of the doors.
If the delayed locking feature is on, the doors will not
lock until five seconds after the last door is closed. Press
the lock symbol twice to override this feature and lock
all of the doors immediately. See Delayed Locking
on page 2-9 for more information.
K (Unlock):
symbol.
2-8
To unlock the doors, press the unlock
This switch operates identically to the power door lock
switches on the driver’s and front passenger’s armrests.
Delayed Locking
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the keyless entry transmitter and a door or the liftgate
(if equipped) is open, the delayed locking feature
will delay locking the doors until five seconds after the
last door is closed. You will hear three chimes to
signal that the delayed locking feature is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on the
keyless entry transmitter twice will override the delayed
locking feature and immediately lock all the doors.
You can turn the delayed locking feature off or back on
again by doing the following:
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch in the
lock position.
2. Press unlock twice on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
You can also program this feature using the DIC.
See “Delayed Locking” under DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-44.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlock
feature which enables you to program your vehicle’s
power door locks. You can program this feature through
the Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the following
method. See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-44
for more information on DIC programming.
Programmable Locking Feature
The following is the list of available programming
options:
Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is shifted
out of Park.
Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
Mode 3: No automatic door locking.
2-9
The following instructions tell you how to change the
automatic door lock mode. Choose one of the three
programming options listed above before entering the
program mode. To enter the program mode, do the
following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN then back to LOCK twice.
Then, with the key in LOCK, release the turn
signal/multifunction lever. Once you do this, the
doors will lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice,
and a 30-second timer will begin. You are now
ready to program the automatic door lock feature.
3. Press the lock side of the power lock switch once.
You will hear one, two, or three chimes. The number
of chimes tells you which lock mode is currently
selected. Continue to press the door lock switch until
the number of chimes that you hear matches the
number of the mode that you want. If you take longer
than 30 seconds, the locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that
you have left the program mode. If this occurs, you
can repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1 to
re-enter the programming mode.
2-10
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN (the doors will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode). If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming
mode, the current automatic settings will not be
modified.
Programmable Unlocking Feature
The following is the list of available programming
options:
Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removed
from the ignition.
Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.
The following instructions tell you how to change the
automatic door unlock mode. Choose one of the
four programming options listed above before entering
the program mode. To enter the program mode, do
the following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with
the key in LOCK, release the turn
signal/multifunction lever. Once you do this, the
doors will lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice,
and a 30-second timer will begin. You are now
ready to program the automatic door unlock feature.
3. Press the unlock side of the power lock switch once.
You will hear one, two, three, or four chimes. The
number of chimes tells you which unlock mode
is currently selected. Continue to press the
door unlock switch until the number of chimes that
you hear matches the number of the mode that
you want. If you take longer than 30 seconds, the
locks will automatically lock and unlock and the horn
will chirp twice to indicate that you have left the
program mode. If this occurs, you can repeat
the procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter the
programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN (the doors will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode). If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming
mode, the current automatic settings will not be
modified.
Rear Door Security Locks
With this feature, you can lock the rear doors so they
can’t be opened from the inside by passengers.
This feature is located on
the inside edge of the rear
doors.
2-11
To use one of the locks, do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. Turn the lock
counterclockwise with
your ignition key to
engage the rear door
security lock.
The rear doors or your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use. If you want to
open the rear door while the security lock is engaged,
unlock the door and open the door from the outside.
To disengage the child security lock feature, turn
the lock clockwise with your ignition key.
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking your key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door
is open.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock.
3. Close the door.
4. Do the same thing to the other rear door.
2-12
Liftgate
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can not see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Automatic Climate
Control System on page 3-19.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.
To unlock the liftgate, press the unlock button on any of
the power door lock switches or the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
Open the liftgate by pulling the handle located in the
center of the door.
To lock the liftgate, press the lock button on any of the
power door lock switches or the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
2-13
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-14
Power Windows
Express-Down Windows
The driver’s and front passenger’s window switches
have an express-down feature that allows you to lower
the window without continuously pressing the switch.
Press the top of the window switch down fully to activate
the feature. Lightly tap the switch to open the window
slightly. The express-down feature can be interrupted at
any time by pulling up on the top of the switch.
Lockout Switch
Press the lockout switch to prevent passengers from
operating the power windows from their switches. A light
in the lockout switch will come on to show that the
switch has been activated. Press the lockout switch
again to return to normal operation.
The controls for the power windows are located on the
armrest on each of the side doors. The switches
operate the windows when the ignition is in RUN,
ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See “Retained Accessory Power” under
Ignition Positions on page 2-19.
The driver’s door also has a switch for each of the
passenger’s windows.
Press the top of the switch to lower the window. Pull up
the top of the switch to raise the window.
2-15
Sun Visors
With this system, the
security light in the
instrument panel cluster will
flash as you open the door
if your ignition is off.
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also swing them out to help block glare at the
front and side windows.
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors
Pull the sunvisor down and lift the mirror cover to turn
on the lamps.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle is equipped with a content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
2-16
This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. Here’s how to do it:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The security
light should come on and stay on.
3. Close all doors. The security light should go off
after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed
until the security light goes off.
If a locked door is opened without the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. The
headlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes,
and the horn will sound for 30 seconds, then will turn
off to save the battery power. You can choose different
feedback options for the alarm. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-44.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual
door lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock
switch with the door open, or with the remote keyless
entry transmitter. You should also remember that
you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if
the alarm has been set off.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door with
the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing
unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter. The alarm
won’t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
While the alarm is set, the power door unlock switch is
not operational.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. The
horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-102.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.
2-17
Passlock®
®
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock®
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with
a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition
lock cylinder is tampered with, the fuel system is
disabled and the vehicle will not start.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
During normal operation, the security light will turn off
approximately five seconds after the key is turned
to RUN.
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before
trying to restart the engine. Remember to release
the key from START as soon as the engine starts.
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts.
If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
needs service.
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine
off. However, your Passlock® system is not working
properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your
vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at this time. You
may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-102. See your dealer for service.
In an emergency, call the Roadside Assistance Center.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5.
2-18
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
Trailer on page 4-75 for more information.
Ignition Positions
With your key in the ignition switch you can turn it to
four different positions.
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you
can not turn it, be sure you are using the correct
key; if so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only with
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break the
key or the ignition switch. If none of these works,
then your vehicle needs service.
B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use
things like the radio, power windows and the windshield
wipers when the engine is off.
C (RUN): This position is for driving.
D (START): This position starts your engine.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The Retained Accessory Power (RAP) feature will allow
certain features on your vehicle to continue to work for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to LOCK.
A (LOCK): This position locks your ignition and
transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove your key when the ignition is
turned to LOCK.
2-19
Starting Your Engine
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0°F or −18°C), do this:
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position – that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
the key.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds
between each try to help avoid draining your battery
or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
2-20
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine coolant
heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At
temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Locate the electrical
cord near the front
recovery loop on the
driver’s side of the
vehicle.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
2-21
Automatic Transmission Operation
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission
and features an electronic shift position indicator
located within the instrument panel cluster.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your drive wheels. It’s
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle can’t move easily.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 2-30. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-75.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
CAUTION:
2-22
(Continued)
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle will be free to roll — even if your
shift lever is in PARK (P) — if your transfer
case is in NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. See
Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-30.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-56.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the drive wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
2-23
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you’re:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road driving.
You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3)
or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often.
If you manually select SECOND (2), the transmission
will drive in second gear. You may use this feature
for reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are
trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery
road surfaces. Once the vehicle is moving, shift into
DRIVE (D).
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power,
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the transmission won’t shift into first gear
until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
however it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D).
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
On cold days, approximately 32°F (0°C) or colder, your
transmission is designed to shift differently until the
engine reaches normal operating temperature. This is
intended to improve heater performance.
2-24
Tow/Haul Mode
Transfer Case Buttons
Your vehicle is equipped
with a tow/haul mode. The
button is located on the
instrument panel to
the right of the steering
wheel.
The transfer case buttons
are located to the right of
the instrument panel
cluster. Use these switches
to shift into and out of the
different all-wheel drive
modes.
You can use this feature to assist when towing or
hauling a heavy load. See “Tow/Haul Mode” under
Towing a Trailer on page 4-75 for more information.
You can choose between four modes:
All-Wheel Drive
G (4HI):
All-wheel drive sends your engine’s driving power to all
four wheels for extra traction. To get the most
satisfaction out of all-wheel drive, you must be familiar
with its operation.
Notice: Driving on pavement in 4HI Lock or
4LO Lock for extended periods may cause
premature wear on your vehicle’s powertrain and
tires. Do not drive in 4HI Lock or 4LO Lock on
pavement for extended periods.
This setting is used for driving in most
street and highway situations. You can also use this
setting for light or variable off-road conditions.
H (4HI Lock): Use this mode when you need extra
traction in most off-road situations such as sand,
mud, snow or level, rocky trails.
2-25
I(4LO Lock): This mode delivers extra torque to all
four wheels and is used for extreme off-road conditions.
You might choose 4LO Lock if you are driving off-road,
deep sand, mud, or snow and climbing or descending
steep hills.
When in this mode you can also choose to lock the rear
axle for additional traction in extreme off-road situations.
See Locking Rear Axle on page 4-11.
Notice: Operating your vehicle in 4LO Lock above
50 mph (80 km/h) for any extended period of time
could cause damage to the transfer case. Do
not operate your vehicle in 4LO Lock above 50 mph
(80 km/h) for extended periods.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone
else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set
the parking brake before placing the transfer
case in NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake on
page 2-29.
2-26
N (NEUTRAL): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-65 or Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-65 for more information.
Indicator lights in the buttons show which mode you are
in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you
turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights do
not come on, you should take your vehicle to your
dealer for service. An indicator light will flash while
shifting the transfer case. It will remain illuminated when
the shift is complete. If for some reason the transfer
case cannot make a requested shift, it will return to the
last chosen setting.
If the SERVICE 4WD message stays on, you should
take your vehicle to your dealer for service. See “Service
4WD message” under Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-44.
Shifting into 4HI or 4HI Lock
With the vehicle traveling less than 40 mph (64 km/h),
press and release the 4HI or 4HI Lock button. The
indicator light will flash while shifting. It will remain
illuminated when the shift is complete.
It may be necessary to drive backwards for a short
distance of 25 feet (7.5 m) to get the lock feature
to disengage.
Shifting into 4LO Lock
To shift into 4LO Lock, the ignition must be in RUN and
the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than
2 mph (3.2 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have
your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press
and release the 4LO Lock button. You must wait for
the 4LO Lock indicator light to stop flashing and remain
illuminated before shifting your transmission in gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the indicator light stops flashing could cause
damage to the transfer case. Always wait until the
indicator lights stops flashing before putting
the transmission back in gear.
It is typical for your vehicle to exhibit significant
engagement noise and bump when shifting between
4LO and 4HI ranges or from NEUTRAL with the engine
running.
If the 4LO Lock button is pressed when your vehicle is
in gear and/or moving, the 4LO Lock indicator light
will flash for 15 seconds and not complete the
shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 2 mph
(3.2 km/h) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).
After 15 seconds the transfer case will return to
the setting last chosen.
Shifting Out of 4LO Lock
To shift from 4LO Lock to 4HI or 4HI Lock, your vehicle
must be stopped or moving less than 2 mph (3.2 km/h)
with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the ignition in
RUN. The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO
Lock is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI or 4HI Lock
button. You must wait for the 4HI or 4HI Lock indicator
light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before
shifting your transmission into gear.
It is typical for your vehicle to exhibit significant
engagement noise and bump when shifting between
4LO and 4HI ranges or from NEUTRAL with the engine
running.
2-27
If the 4HI or 4HI Lock button is pressed when your
vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI or 4HI Lock
indicator light will flash for 15 seconds but will not
complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less
than 2 mph (3.2 km/h) and the transmission is in
NEUTRAL (N).
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the indicator light stops flashing could cause
damage to the transfer case. Always wait until the
indicator lights stops flashing before putting
the transmission back in gear.
Shifting into NEUTRAL
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL, do the following:
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
10. Release the parking brake prior to towing.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
To shift the transfer case out of NEUTRAL, do the
following:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn the
ignition to RUN with the engine off.
3. Press the button for the desired transfer case shift
position (4HI, 4HI Lock or 4LO Lock).
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
not roll.
4. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL
the red light will go out.
2. Set the parking brake.
5. You may start the engine and shift the transmission
to the desired position.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN.
4. Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle.
5. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
6. Shift the transfer case to 4HI.
7. Simultaneously press and hold the 4HI and 4LO
Lock buttons for 10 seconds. The red NEUTRAL
light will come on when the transfer case shift
to NEUTRAL is complete.
2-28
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the indicator light stops flashing could cause
damage to the transfer case. Always wait until the
indicator lights stops flashing before putting
the transmission back in gear.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
A chime will activate and the warning light will flash
when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle
is moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least three
seconds.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located
above the parking brake pedal, with the parking
brake symbol, to release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-75.
2-29
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-75.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
2-30
• Press the button on the end of the shift lever.
3. While still pressing the
button, move the lever
forward as far as it
will go. Let go of
the button and the
lever.
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
2-31
Torque Lock
Parking Over Things That Burn
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
vehicle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle
may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock.
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-30.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-22.
2-32
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can not see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Winter Driving on page 4-52.
2-33
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
All-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case
in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll, even
if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in
NEUTRAL. Always set your parking brake.
2-34
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-30.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-75.
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature
Display
The automatic dimming mirror will automatically dim to
the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind
you after dark.
The mirror also includes a display in the upper right
corner of the mirror. The compass reading and
the outside temperature will both appear in the display
at the same time. The dual display can be turned
on or off by briefly pressing either the TEMP or the
COMP button.
Temperature Display
Compass Operation
The temperature can be displayed by pressing the
TEMP button. Press the TEMP button once briefly to
toggle the temperature reading on and off. To alternate
the temperature reading between Fahrenheit and
Celsius, press and hold the TEMP button for
approximately four seconds until the display blinks °F
and °C. Press and release the TEMP button to
toggle between the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings.
After about four seconds of inactivity, the display
will stop blinking and display the last selection made.
Press the COMP button once briefly to turn the compass
on or off.
Press and release the TEMP button to toggle the
temperature display between Fahrenheit or Celsius.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
extended period of time (30 minutes), see your
dealer. Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating
the temperature is normal.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Press and hold the TEMP button for about eight seconds
to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off. The
indicator light to the right of the TEMP button will turn on
or off to show you when the automatic dimming
feature is activated. Once the mirror is turned off, it will
remain off until it is turned back on, or until the
vehicle is restarted.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the compass heading.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.
• After about five seconds, the display does not show
a compass heading (N for North, for example),
there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with
the compass. Such interference may be caused
by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad
holder or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
in the COMP button for about eight seconds or until
CAL is displayed.
2-35
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at five mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, your
compass could give false readings.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you live outside
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as during
a long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust for compass variance.
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map.
2. Press and hold the COMP button for five seconds
until a zone number appears in the display.
3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button, the display
will show a compass direction within a few seconds.
2-36
Cleaning the Mirror
Use a paper towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the
mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
Outside Power Mirrors
The controls are located
on the driver’s door
armrest.
Move the upper selector switch to the left or right to
choose the mirror you want to adjust; then press
the dots located on the four-way control pad to adjust
the mirror.
The mirrors may also include a memory function which
works in conjunction with the memory seats. See
Memory Seat on page 2-51 for more information.
Power Folding Mirrors
To fold or unfold the mirrors, move the selector switch,
located above the mirror control, to the middle
position. The mirror control will illuminate. Press the
right or left side of the mirror control to fold or unfold the
mirrors. You may notice the mirror glass adjust as the
mirrors fold in; this is normal. The mirror glass will
reposition itself once the mirrors are unfolded.
If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually,
they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds
and may not stay in the unfolded position. If this
happens, you will need to reset the mirrors. See
“Resetting the Power Folding Mirrors” next.
2-37
Resetting the Power Folding Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
You will need to reset the power folding mirrors if:
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
• They are accidently manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors, fold and unfold them
at least three times using the mirror controls. This will
reset them to their normal detent position.
2-38
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Outside Heated Mirrors
Your vehicle may have this feature.
This button is located on
the climate control panel.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
with Curb View Assist
Your vehicle may have this feature.
The driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glare of the
headlamps behind you. See Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature Display
on page 2-34.
Your vehicle’s mirrors will also be capable of performing
the curb view assist mirror function. This feature will
cause the passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a
preselected position when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). This feature may be useful in allowing
you to view the curb when you are parallel parking.
Press this button to warm the heated driver’s and
passenger’s outside rearview mirrors to help clear them
of ice, snow and condensation.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and a
short delay has occurred, the passenger’s and/or
driver’s mirror will return to its original position.
If your vehicle has a rear window defogger, it will also
operate when you press this button. See “Rear Window
Defogger” under Automatic Climate Control System
on page 3-19 for more information.
To change the preselected tilt position, adjust the
mirrors to the desired position while the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (R), this new position is saved in memory as
the tilt position.
2-39
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the Driver
Information Center. See Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 3-44 for more information.
Calling and OnStar® Virtual Advisor use. Terms and
conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be
found at www.onstar.com.
OnStar® System
OnStar® Services
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and state of
the art call centers to provide you with a wide range of
safety, security, information and convenience services.
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms
and conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included with your vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com,
contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827),
or press the blue OnStar® button to speak to an
OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
A completed Subscription Service Agreement is required
prior to delivery of OnStar® services and prepaid
calling minutes are also required for OnStar® Personal
2-40
One of the following plans is normally included for a
specific duration with each vehicle equipped with
OnStar®. You can upgrade or extend your OnStar®
service plan to meet your needs.
Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan services
• Route Support
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
Luxury and Leisure Plan
• All Directions and Connections Plan services
• Personal Concierge
OnStar® Personal Calling
®
As an OnStar subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability is there for you if your hand-held cell phone is
lost, forgotten or has a low battery. It’s a hands-free
wireless phone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You
can place calls nationwide using simple voice
commands with no additional contracts and no additional
roaming charges. For more information, refer to the
OnStar® user’s guide included with your vehicle’s
glovebox literature, visit www.onstar.com, contact
OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or
press the blue OnStar® button to speak to an OnStar®
advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Calling
that uses minutes to access up-to-date weather and
traffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,
stock quotes, entertainment and more. You are also able
to listen and reply to your e-mail through your vehicle’s
speakers. See the OnStar® user’s guide for more
information.
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
g: If your vehicle is
equipped with the steering
wheel control buttons
you can use them
to interact with the OnStar®
system.
See the OnStar® user’s guide for more information.
2-41
HomeLink® Transmitter
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Programming the HomeLink®
Transmitter
HomeLink® a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three
hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink® information can be found on the internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer
garage door opener with rolling codes, please be
sure to follow steps 6 through 8 to complete the
programming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
2-42
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased
for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on the
internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and
released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons
for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat this
step to program a second and/or third transmitter to
the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® buttons while keeping the indicator light
in view.
2-43
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” Do not
repeat Step 1.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to
“time out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming HomeLink®” procedures (regardless of
where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
HomeLink®” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle) your
hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by HomeLink®. The indicator light
will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. Proceed with
Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink®” to complete.
Using HomeLink®
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for at
least half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
2-44
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons
Resetting Defaults
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
To reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than
30 seconds.
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®
indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming HomeLink®.”
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at
1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
Individual buttons can not be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink® Button” next.
Storage Areas
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®
Button
Glove Box
To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®
button previously trained, follow these steps:
To open your glove box, lift up the latch and pull the
door open.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. Do
not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink®.”
2-45
Center Overhead Console
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle has a console compartment between the
bucket seats.
To open it, press the button on the side of the console
and swing the console lid open.
Luggage Carrier
If your vehicle has this feature, you can load cargo on
top of your vehicle.
The luggage carrier consists of siderails attached to the
roof and crossrails which can be moved back and
forth to accommodate various cargo sizes.
Your vehicle is equipped with either a short or long
overhead console.
To open a door on the console, push on the rear edge
of the door and let it swing open. Push the door up
until it latches to close the door.
The overhead consoles also includes reading lamps, the
HomeLink transmitter buttons and the sunroof switch
(if equipped).
2-46
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 300 lbs. (136 kg) or hangs
over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage
your vehicle. Load cargo only on top of the
crossrails and tie the cargo down to the crossrail
support cargo tie-down loops, making sure to fasten
it securely.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-67.
Adjusting the Crossrails
Adjust the crossrails to fit your load by doing the
following:
4. Once you load the cargo onto the crossrails, secure
it by tying it down to the crossrail support cargo
tie-down loops. Do not load cargo directly on
the roof of your vehicle.
Be sure you do not cover the roof marker lamps or
the Center-High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) (If
equipped) with cargo.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo check now and
then to make sure the luggage and cargo are still
securely fastened and the crossrails are tight.
Stop Tabs
1. Loosen the lock knobs on the crossrail supports by
turning the knobs counterclockwise. Only loosen
them enough to allow the crossrails to slide easily.
2. Slide the crossrails to the desired position, being
sure to align the lines in the side rails with the
arrows on the crossrail supports.
3. Tighten the lock knobs and then try to move the
crossrails back and forth to be sure that they do
not move.
2-47
If your vehicle has a sunroof, it will have a crossrail stop
tab placed in the siderail in the spot labeled SUN—ROOF
STOP. This tab prevents you from moving the crossrails
past the opening of the sunroof and loading cargo too far
forward.
The crossrails have built in channels to allow you to
attach other items designed for this system, such
as basket luggage carriers, bike racks, ski racks, etc.
To use the crossrail channels, do the following:
Your vehicle will also have a stop tab in the crossrail in
the spot labeled ON STAR STOP. This tab prevents
loading cargo too close to the OnStar antenna which will
cause the OnStar and navigation system (if equipped)
to function improperly or not at all.
Vehicles with the off-road lamps will have additional
stop tabs placed in the siderails to prevent you
from moving the lamps too far rearward, causing them
to shine into the optional sunroof opening.
Crossrail Channels
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that does not have enough
clearance for any roof-mounted accessories (such
as off-road lamps or a roof basket) on your vehicle,
you can damage your vehicle. To avoid damaging
your vehicle in a car wash, remove any
roof-mounted accessories if you can, and do not
use an automatic car wash while roof-mounted
accessories are on your vehicle. See Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-95 for more
information.
2-48
1. Use the included key to unlock the crossrail end
cap by turning it counterclockwise. If you ever
loose a key, your dealer will be able to help you
obtain a replacement.
2. Pull the end cap
straight out from the
crossrail.
Rear Seat Armrest
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear armrest/cupholder.
To open it, pull up and then out on the tab, located at the
top center of the armrest, and pull the armrest down.
Cargo Tie Downs
3. Peel back the rub strip from the crossrail.
4. Slide the accessory you are using into the crossrail
channel and secure it as the accessory instructions
direct.
5. Place the crossrail endcap back on and lock it with
the key.
You will not be using the rub strip when using crossrail
accessories. When you remove any crossrail
accessory, be sure to reinstall the rub strip. To do this,
press the rub strip in place until it seats into the
channel of the crossrail.
There are two cargo tie downs located on the inside of
the liftgate in the rear of the vehicle. You can use
these to secure cargo inside the vehicle with the liftgate
closed.
2-49
Sunroof
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To operate your sunroof, the ignition needs to
be on or RAP needs to be active. See “Retained
Accessory Power” under Ignition Positions on page 2-19.
The switch used to operate the sunroof is located in
the overhead console.
2-50
The sunroof is equipped with five positions:
• First open stop: To open the sunroof and
sunshade, press and hold the rear side of the switch
until the sunroof reaches the desired position or
until it reaches the first open stop. For more
information on using the sunshade, see “Sunshade
Operation” later in this section.
• Second open stop: To open it further, press and
hold the rear side of the switch until the sunroof
reaches the desired position or until it reaches the
second open stop.
• Fully open: To open the sunroof completely, press
and hold the rear side of the switch until the
sunroof opens completely.
• Closed: To close the sunroof, press and hold the
front of the switch until the sunroof reaches the
desired position or until it is fully closed and stops
on its own. The sunroof will not be fully seated
unless the switch is held until the sunroof stops
moving.
• Vent: The vent position allows you to open the rear
of the sunroof by tilting it upward. To use the vent
position, start with the sunroof in the fully closed
position, then press and hold the front side of the
switch until the sunroof reaches the desired
vent position or until it stops moving. To close the
sunroof from the vent position, press and hold
the rear side of the switch until the sunroof is fully
closed.
Vehicle Personalization
Memory Seat
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls for the
memory function are
located on the driver’s door.
Do not to leave the sunroof open for long periods of
time as debris may collect in the tracks.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade will open automatically when opening the
sunroof.
To adjust the sunshade, pull it backward or forward to
the desired position. The sunshade can not be
closed further than the current closed position of the
sunroof.
Although the sunshade opens automatically when
opening the sunroof, it must be manually pulled closed
after closing the sunroof.
These buttons are used to program and recall memory
settings for the driver’s seat, both the driver’s and
passenger’s outside mirror, the radio station presets,
and the previously used climate control system settings.
The settings for these features can be personalized
for both driver 1 and driver 2. Driver 1 or driver 2
corresponds to the memory buttons labeled 1 and 2 on
the driver’s door and the numbers on the back of
the remote keyless entry transmitters.
2-51
To store the memory settings, do the following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat (including the seatback
recliner, lumbar, and side wing area), both of the
outside mirrors, and the radio station presets to your
preference.
2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 (for driver 1 or 2) button
of the memory control for three seconds. A double
chime will sound to let you know that the position
has been stored.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released while
the vehicle is in PARK (P), a single chime will sound and
the memory position will be recalled.
2-52
If you use the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter to enter your vehicle, the preset driver’s
seat, mirror positions, radio station presets and
the previously used climate control system settings will
be recalled if programmed to do so through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-44. The numbers on the back of
the transmitters, 1 or 2, correspond to the numbers on
the memory controls.
The seat, radio station presets and mirror positions can
also be recalled when placing the key in the ignition
if programmed to do so through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Operation and Displays on
page 3-44.
To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at
any time, press one of the memory buttons or power
seat controls.
Easy Exit Seat
The controls for this memory function are located on the
driver’s door.
B (Easy Exit Seat):
This button is used to program
and recall the desired driver’s seat position when
exiting/entering the vehicle. The seat position, can be
personalized for both driver 1 and driver 2.
To store the seat exit position for driver 1 or 2, do the
following:
1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button or press the
unlock button on the desired remote keyless entry
transmitter. The seat will move to the stored
memory position.
3. Press and hold the exit button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will sound
to let you know that the position has been stored
for the identified driver (1 or 2).
To use the seat exit position, do one of the following:
• Press the exit button on the memory control.
• Or, if this feature is activated in the DIC, then
remove the key from the ignition; the seat will then
move to the exit position.
See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-44 for more
information on activating this feature in the DIC.
2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.
2-53
✍ NOTES
2-54
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-2
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-4
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-5
Horn .............................................................3-5
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-5
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-6
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-13
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-16
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-18
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-18
Climate Controls ............................................3-19
Automatic Climate Control System ...................3-19
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-25
Climate Controls Personalization .....................3-25
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-26
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-27
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-28
Tachometer .................................................3-28
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-28
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-28
Air Bag Off Light ..........................................3-30
Charging System Light ..................................3-32
Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-32
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-33
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-34
Traction Off Light ..........................................3-35
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-35
Transmission Temperature Gage .....................3-36
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-38
Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-41
Security Light ...............................................3-42
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-42
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................3-42
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-43
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-43
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-44
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-44
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-56
Audio System(s) .............................................3-62
Setting the Time ...........................................3-62
Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-63
Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-74
Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-86
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................3-87
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-88
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-89
Radio Reception ...........................................3-90
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player .................3-90
Care of Your CDs and DVDs .........................3-92
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ...................3-92
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-92
Chime Level Adjustment ................................3-92
3-1
Instrument Panel Overview
3-2
The main components of your instrument panel are the
following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-25.
B. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps
on page 3-13.
C. OnStar® and Radio Steering Wheel Buttons (If
Equipped). See OnStar® System on page 2-40 and
Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-89.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-27.
E. Locking Rear Axle and All-wheel Drive Buttons. See
Locking Rear Axle on page 4-11 and All-Wheel
Drive on page 2-25.
F. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-62.
G. Air Bag Switch. See Air Bag Off Switch on
page 1-68.
H. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-45.
I. Rear Wiper/Washer Control. See “Rear Window
Washer/Wiper” under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
on page 3-6.
J. Dome Override Button. See Interior Lamps on
page 3-16.
K. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-6.
L. Tilt Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-5.
M. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-44.
N. Parking Brake Release. See Parking Brake on
page 2-29.
O. Traction Control Button. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9.
P. Tow/Haul Selector Button. See “Tow/Haul Mode”
under Automatic Transmission Operation on
page 2-22.
Q. Ride Height Selector Button (If Equipped). See
Selectable Extended Rear Ride Height on page 4-73.
R. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtrays and
Cigarette Lighter on page 3-18.
S. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 2-22.
T. Accessory Power Outlets (If Equipped). See
Accessory Power Outlets on page 3-18.
U. OnStar Buttons. See OnStar® System on page 2-40.
V. Rear Window Defogger Button. See “Rear Window
Defogger” under Automatic Climate Control
System on page 3-19.
W. Comfort Control System. See Automatic Climate
Control System on page 3-19.
3-3
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning
flasher button is located at
the top of the steering
column.
Press the button to make your front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
To turn off the flashers, press the button until the first
click and release.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
But they won’t flash if you’re braking.
3-4
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can use them to
warn others. Set one up at the side of the road about
300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the steering
wheel.
Tilt Wheel
The tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive. You can raise it to the highest
level to give your legs more room when you enter
and exit the vehicle.
The tilt lever is located on the driver’s side of the
steering column under the turn signal lever.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable
level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
3-5
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Turn and Lane Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
For information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 3-13.
3-6
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn
signal.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-102.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will
also appear in the DIC. To turn the chime and message
off, move the turn signal lever to the off position.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
53(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer):
To
change the headlamps from low to high beam, push the
lever toward the instrument panel. To return to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward
you, then release it.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation.
3-7
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
8(Mist):
Windshield Washer
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. The
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more
wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
N(Delay):
You can set the wiper speed for a long or
short delay between wipes. This can be very useful
in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay
time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter
the delay.
L(Washer Fluid):
There is a paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push
the paddle. The wipers will clear the window and then
either stop or return to your preset speed.
{CAUTION:
6 (Low Speed):
For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past
the delay settings.
1 (High Speed):
For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
9(Off):
3-8
To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Rear Window Washer/Wiper
Cruise Control
If your vehicle has a rear
window washer/wiper, this
knob is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob to either 1 or 2.
For long delayed wiping, turn the knob to 1. For short
delayed wiping, turn the knob to 2
9(Off): To turn the wiper off, turn the knob to this
symbol.
=(Washer Fluid):
To wash the window, press the
knob with this symbol.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If you can wash your windshield but not your rear
windows, check the fluid level.
9(Off): This position
turns the system off.
R(On):
This position activates the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.
T(Set):
Press this button to set the speed.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
3-9
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can not drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
3-10
The cruise symbol on the
instrument panel will
illuminate when the cruise
control is engaged.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to
reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. If the
accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds,
cruise control will turn off.
• Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay
there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
3-11
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
3-12
Ending Cruise Control
There are four ways to turn off the cruise control:
•
•
•
•
Step lightly on the brake pedal,
move the cruise control switch to off, or
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
If road conditions cause the traction control system
to activate, cruise control will turn off.
• If the accelerator pedal is held for 60 seconds or
longer, cruise control will turn off.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior Lamps
AUTO: Turn the control to this position to put the
system into automatic headlamp mode. The Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) will also be activated if it is light
enough outside.
;(Parking Lamps):
Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps, together with the
following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
The control on the driver’s side of your instrument panel
operates the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
9(Off): Turn the knob to this position and release it
to turn off all exterior lamps including the DRLs. To turn
any lamps back on when in the off mode, turn the
knob to the desired lamp mode. To return to the AUTO
mode, turn the knob to the off position and release
it. The off mode will also cancel and the lamps will return
to the AUTO when the vehicle is turned off. This
mode is not available for vehicles first sold in Canada.
Parking Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Roof Marker Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
2(Headlamps):
Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
When the vehicle is turned off and the headlamps are in
AUTO, the headlamps may automatically remain on
for a set time. You can change this delay time using the
DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-44.
You can switch your headlamps from low to high-beam
by pushing the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
the instrument panel.
3-13
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside and the headlamp
switch is in AUTO, your automatic headlamp system will
turn on your headlamps at the normal brightness
along with other lamps such as the taillamps,
sidemarker, parking lamps, roof marker lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the
exterior lamps switch to the off position and then
release.
Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered, or the
system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
3-14
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See “Instrument
Panel Brightness” under Interior Lamps on page 3-16.
Lamps On Reminder
If a door is open, a reminder chime will sound when
your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned
on and your key is out of the ignition. To turn off
the chime, turn the headlamp switch to off or AUTO and
then back on. In the automatic mode, the headlamps
turn off once the ignition is in LOCK and the headlamps
on at exit delay ends (if enabled in the DIC).
Daytime Running Lamps
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
•
•
•
•
The ignition is on,
the exterior lamps control is in AUTO,
the transmission is not in PARK (P), and
the light sensor determines it is daytime.
When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be
on. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
3-15
Off-Road Lamps
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that does not have enough
clearance for any roof-mounted accessories (such
as off-road lamps or a roof basket) on your vehicle,
you can damage your vehicle. To avoid damaging
your vehicle in a car wash, remove any
roof-mounted accessories if you can, and do not
use an automatic car wash while roof-mounted
accessories are on your vehicle. See Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-95 for more
information.
The off-road lamps, if equipped, are designed to
enhance the appearance of your vehicle and to provide
auxiliary lighting when your vehicle is used off road.
The safety characteristics of these lamps are limited and
they are not intended to be used in conjunction with,
or in place of, existing vehicle lighting. The lamps are not
to be used on any public street or highway and are to
be covered when not in use. Check your state and local
laws before installing or using any auxiliary lighting.
In some states it may be necessary to remove the roof
lamps when operating the vehicle on the highway.
The button for the off-road lamps is located in the
overhead console.
3-16
To use the lamps, be sure the engine is running.
Remove the covers form the lamps and press the button
to turn them on. Press the button again to turn them
off. An indicator light will glow near the button when the
lamps are on.
Notice: Turning on the off-road lamps before
removing the lamp covers could damage the
off-road lamps and the covers. Always remove the
covers before turning on the off-road lamps.
The off-road lamps will remain on even after the ignition
is turned off. The off-road lamps button must be
pressed to turn them off.
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
The thumbwheel for this feature is located next to the
exterior lamps control.
D (Instrument Panel Lights): Turn the thumbwheel
up or down to brighten or dim the instrument panel lights
and the radio display. This will only work if the
headlamps or parking lamps are on.
To turn on the dome lamps, with the vehicle doors
closed, turn the thumbwheel all the way up.
Dome Lamps
Reading Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door
and will turn off when all doors are closed.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the
thumbwheel, located next to the exterior lamp control, all
the way up. In this position, the dome lamps will
remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
E (Dome Override):
Press this button, located below
the exterior lamp control, to turn dome lamps off
even while a door is opened. To return the lamps to
automatic operation, press the button again and it will
return to the out position. In this position, the dome
lamps will come on when you open a door.
Entry/Exit Lighting
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry/exit
feature.
When a door is opened or the key is removed from the
ignition, the dome lamps will come on if the dome
override button is in the out position.
Your vehicle has reading lamps located in the overhead
console. Press the button located next to the lamp to
turn it on. The lamps can be adjusted to point in
the direction you want.
Press the button again to turn the lamp off.
These lamps will also come on with the dome lamps.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome lamps if they are left on
for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is in lock.
This will keep your battery from running down.
3-17
Accessory Power Outlets
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may be equipped with up to five accessory
power outlets. The two front outlets, if equipped, are
located under the OnStar® buttons on the instrument
panel behind hinged doors.
If your vehicle has an ashtray, it is removable and fits
into the front cupholder. Pull up on the ashtray door
to open it.
The two middle outlets, if equipped, are located on the
back of the center console.
There may also be an outlet located in the rear of the
vehicle near the liftgate. Flip the cover open to use
the outlet. Close the cover when the outlet is not in use.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlets and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information on
the accessory power plugs.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
3-18
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
To remove the ashtray, pull it out from the console. To
reinstall the ashtray, slide it back to the original
position.
To use the cigarette lighter, if equipped, push it in all
the way, and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out
by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
Climate Controls
Automatic Climate Control System
With this system, you can control the heating,
cooling and ventilation in your vehicle.
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob
The driver’s side knob is used to adjust the temperature
of the air coming through the system on the driver’s
side. The temperature can be adjusted even if the
system is turned off. This is possible since outside air
will always flow through the system as the vehicle
is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.
See “Recirculation” later in this section.
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or
increase the cabin temperature. The display will show
the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an
arrow pointing to the driver will be displayed under
and to the left of the temperature setting.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob
You can select different climate control settings for the
driver and passengers.
The passenger’s side knob can be used to change the
temperature of the air coming through the system on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle. The temperature can be
adjusted even if the system is turned off. This is possible
since outside air will always flow through the system as
the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to
recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in this
section.
3-19
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or
increase the cabin temperature. The display will show
the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an
arrow pointing to the passenger will be displayed
under and to the right of the temperature setting.
The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to
match the driver’s temperature setting by pressing and
holding the AUTO button for four seconds. Both the
driver and passenger arrows will be displayed.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active the system will control the inside temperature, the
air delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display will change to
show the current driver’s set temperature, delivery
mode and fan speed. Press the AUTO button again
within five seconds to display the passenger’s set
temperature.
3-20
If the driver and passenger’s temperature settings
are not the same, the opposite side temperature
setting will be displayed for an additional five
seconds. To make the passenger’s temperature the
same as the driver’s press and hold the AUTO
button for about four seconds.
When auto is selected, the air conditioning operation
and air inlet will be automatically controlled. The
air conditioning compressor will run when the
outside temperature is over about 40°F (4°C). The
air inlet will normally be set to outside air. If it’s
hot outside, the air inlet may automatically switch to
recirculate inside air to help quickly cool down
your vehicle. The light on the button will illuminate
in recirculation.
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to regulate. Turn the driver’s or
passenger’s side temperature knob to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the
temperature setting of 60°F (15°C) the system
will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you
choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C)
the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the
top of the instrument panel near the windshield. This
sensor regulates air temperature based on sun
load, and also turns on your headlamps.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the
system will delay turning on the fan until warm air is
available. The length of delay depends on the
engine coolant temperature. Pressing the fan switch
will override this delay and change the fan to a
selected speed.
9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and
will be directed to the floor. This direction can be changed
by pressing the mode button. The temperature can also
be adjusted using either temperature knob. Press the up
or down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost button, the
AUTO button, or the air conditioning button to turn the
system on when it is off.
Manual Operation
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or fan
speed.
w9x (Fan):
Pressing this button when the system is off will turn the
system on.
C (Mode): Press this button to manually change the
direction of the airflow in your vehicle; keep pressing the
button until the desired mode appears on the display.
If you press the mode button to select an air delivery
mode, the display will change to show you the selected
air mode delivery. The display will then show the
current status of the system. When the system is turned
off, the display will go blank after displaying the
current status of the system.
H (Panel):
This setting will deliver air to the
instrument panel outlets.
)(Bi-Level):
This setting will deliver warmer air to the
floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.
6 (Floor):
This setting will deliver air to the floor
outlets.
- (Defog):
See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in
this section.
The switch with the fan symbol allows
you to manually adjust the fan speed. Press the up
arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow
to decrease fan speed.
3-21
@(Recirculation):
Press this button to limit the
amount of outside air entering your vehicle. The light on
the recirculation button will glow. This is helpful when you
are trying to limit odors entering your vehicle and for
maximum air conditioning performance in hot weather.
Press this button again to allow outside air to enter the
vehicle. The light on the recirculation button will go off.
Pressing this button also cancels the auto recirculation
feature. To resume the auto recirculation function, press
the AUTO button. Each time the vehicle is started, the
system will revert to the auto recirculation function.
If you select recirculation while in defrost, defog or floor,
the light in the button will flash and then go out to let you
know that this is not allowed. This is normal and helps to
prevent fogging.
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the system
in recirculation for extended periods of time may cause
fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the fog, select
either defog or front defrost.
You may also notice that the A/C compressor will run
while in recirculation mode. This is normal and helps to
prevent fogging.
9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and
will be directed to the floor. This direction can be changed
by pressing the mode button. The temperature can also
be adjusted using either temperature knob. Press the up
or down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost button, the
AUTO button, or the air conditioning button to turn the
system on when it is off.
Display
If you press the MODE button to select an air delivery
mode, the display will change to show you the selected
air delivery mode. After ten seconds, the display will
change to show the driver temperature setting and the
selected mode.
If you press the up or down arrows on the fan switch,
the display will change to show the selected fan speed.
After ten seconds, the display will change to show
the driver temperature setting and the selected mode.
Whenever you press AUTO, the display will change
to show the following:
• the current driver’s set temperature and an arrow
for five seconds,
• the current passenger’s set temperature setting and
an arrow for five seconds and
• the automatic air delivery mode and fan speed.
3-22
If the driver’s and passenger’s temperature settings are
the same when AUTO is pressed, the temperature setting
and both arrows will be displayed for five seconds along
with the automatic air delivery mode and fan speed. After
the five second update, the display will change to show
the temperature setting, both arrows and AUTO.
Air Conditioning
#(Air Conditioning):
Press this button to turn the air
conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. The
snowflake symbol will appear on the display when the
A/C is on.
Pressing this button when the outside temperature is too
cool for air conditioning to be effective will make the
snowflake symbol flash three times and then turn off to let
you know that the air conditioning mode is not available. If
the air conditioning is on and the outside temperature
drops below a temperature which is too cool for air
conditioning to be effective, the snowflake symbol will
turn off to let you know that the air conditioning mode has
been canceled.
When air conditioning is selected or in AUTO mode, the
system will run the air conditioning automatically to
cool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle. If you
select A/C off while in front defrost, defog or
recirculation, the A/C snowflake symbol will turn off, but
the A/C compressor will still run to help prevent
fogging.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for
your vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows
closed for the air conditioner to work its best.
On cool, but sunny days while using manual operation
of the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warm
air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument
panel outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, turn the
temperature knob to the desired setting.
In AUTO mode the system will cool and dehumidify the
air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode, the
system will maximize its performance by using
recirculation as necessary.
^ (Air Conditioning Off): On some vehicles, when
you turn the air conditioning off, this symbol will appear
on the display. If your vehicle does not have this
symbol, the snowflake symbol will turn off to let you
know the air conditioning is off.
3-23
Heating
Rear Window Defogger
On cold days when using manual operation of the
automatic system, choose floor mode to deliver air to
the floor outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, turn
the temperature knob to the desired setting.
If your vehicle has this feature, the lines you see on the
rear window warm the glass. The rear window
defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the
rear window.
If you want to use the automatic mode, press AUTO
and adjust the temperature by turning the
temperature knob.
<(Rear):
The heater works best if you keep the windows closed
while using it.
Defogging and Defrosting
You can use either defog or front defrost to clear fog or
frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to
clear the windows of fog or moisture. Use the front
defrost button to defrost the front windshield.
-(Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of fog
or moisture. Press the mode button to select this
setting. This setting will deliver air to the floor and
windshield outlets.
0 (Front Defrost): Press the front defrost button to
defrost the windshield. The system will automatically
control the fan speed if you select defrost from AUTO
mode. If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer,
your air conditioning compressor will automatically run to
help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield.
3-24
Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed. If you need additional
warming time, press the button again.
If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this
button will activate them.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear
window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear
window with sharp objects.
Outlet Adjustment
Climate Controls Personalization
Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust the
direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle.
Push the knob in the center of the outlet up, down, left
or right to move the outlet in the direction you would
like. Turn the knob in the center of the outlet so
the louvers open or close to increase or decrease
airflow.
You can store and recall the climate control settings for
temperature, air delivery mode and fan speed for
two different drivers. The personal choice settings
recalled are determined by the transmitter used to enter
the vehicle.
Operation Tips
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
After the button with the unlock symbol on a remote
keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the climate control
will adjust to the last settings of the identified driver.
The settings can also be changed by pressing one of the
memory buttons (1 or 2) located on the driver’s door.
When adjustments are made, the new settings are
automatically saved for that driver.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear
of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout your
vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, etc., may affect
the performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
3-25
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-26
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle also has a message center that works
along with warning lights and gages. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-56.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re
going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-27
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the
driver information center. You can set a personal trip
and business trip odometer. See “Trip Information” under
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-44.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip stem on the
instrument panel cluster.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the
old odometer.
Tachometer
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
3-28
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air
bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag
system, see Air Bag System on page 1-61.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then
the light should go out.
This means the system is
ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-29
Air Bag Off Light
When you turn the right front passenger’s air bag off,
this light will come on and stay on to remind you that the
air bag has been turned off. This light will go off when
you turn the air bag back on again. See Air Bag
Off Switch on page 1-68. for more on this, including
important safety information.
Canada
United States
3-30
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s air bag is turned
off for a person who isn’t in a risk group
identified by the national government, that
person won’t have the extra protection of an
air bag. In a crash, the air bag wouldn’t be able
to inflate and help protect the person sitting
there. Don’t turn off the passenger’s air bag
unless the person sitting there is in a risk
group. See ″Air Bag Off Switch″ in the Index
for more on this, including important safety
information.
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the air bag, it means
that something may be wrong with the air bag
system. The right front passenger’s air bag
could inflate even though the switch is off. If
this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a member
of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right
front passenger’s position (for example, don’t
secure a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front seat) until you have your vehicle serviced.
3-31
Charging System Light
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays on,
or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. It could indicate that
you have problems with a generator drive belt, or another
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. Driving
while this light is on could drain your battery.
When this light comes on the DIC will also display the
battery not charging message. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-56.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-32
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
in RUN, this gage
shows your battery’s state
of charge in DC volts.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between the
low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light will
flash when you set the parking brake. The light will flash if
the parking brake doesn’t release fully. If you try to drive
with the parking brake engaged, a chime will sound when
the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a
problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there
could be a brake problem. Have your brake system
inspected right away.
3-33
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-65.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
3-34
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on for
several seconds.
That’s normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. You will also hear a chime
sound when the light is on steady. If the regular brake
system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but
you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on you don’t have anti-lock
brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. In
addition to both lights, you will also hear a chime sound
on the first occurrence of a problem and each time the
vehicle is shut off and then restarted. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-33.
Traction Off Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
The traction off light will
come on when a traction
control system or anti-lock
brake system problem
has been detected.
The vehicle may need
service.
When this light is on, the system will not limit wheel
spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-9.
If the Traction Control System (TCS) detects that the
vehicle’s brake’s are overheating, the TCS will shut off
and the traction off light will come on. When the
brakes cool off, the TCS will turn back on automatically
and the traction off light will go out.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage
will read 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a load
or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If the
gage reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates
that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-27.
3-35
Transmission Temperature Gage
When your ignition is on, the gage shows the
temperature of the transmission fluid. The normal
operating range is from 100°F (38°C) to about
265°F (130°C).
At approximately 265°F (130°C), the DIC will display a
TRANSMISSION HOT message and the transmission
will enter a transmission protection mode. When
the transmission enters the protection mode, you may
notice a change in the transmission shifting patterns.
The transmission will return to normal shifting patterns
when the transmission fluid temperature falls below
260°F (127°C).
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission
temperature gage.
3-36
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-44 for
further information.
If the transmission fluid reaches temperatures of
approximately 275°F (135°C) or greater, the DIC will
display a TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE warning message
and a chime will sound. Pull the vehicle off the
roadway when it is safe to do so. Set the parking brake,
place the transmission in PARK (P) and allow the
engine to idle until the transmission temperature falls
below 260°F (127°C). If the transmission continues
to operate above 265°F (130°C), please contact your
nearest dealer or the GM Roadside Assistance Center.
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
• Towing a trailer,
• hot outside air temperatures,
• hauling a large or heavy load,
• low transmission fluid level,
• high transmission fluid level,
• restricted air flow to the radiator.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle with the
transmission temperature gage above normal
operating range, you can damage the transmission.
This could lead to costly repairs that would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not drive your
vehicle while the transmission temperature gage
reading is above normal. See your dealer for service.
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures
on a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for the proper transmission maintenance
intervals.
3-37
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life
of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The check engine light comes on to indicate that there is
a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will
be indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your
vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your
service technician in correctly diagnosing any
malfunction.
3-38
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls may
not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly. This
could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered
by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
3-39
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
3-40
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Gage
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is
running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa
(kilopascals).
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem
causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon
as possible. See Engine Oil on page 5-14.
3-41
Security Light
Cruise Control Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
key toward START.
The light will stay on until
the engine starts.
If the light flashes, the Passlock® system has entered a
tamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see Passlock®
on page 2-18.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock®
system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock®,
and you should see your dealer.
The cruise light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control. See “Cruise
Control” under Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever
on page 3-6.
Tow/Haul Mode Light
This light is displayed
when the tow/haul mode
has been activated.
Also, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-16 for
additional information regarding the security light.
For more information, see “Tow/Haul Mode” under
Towing a Trailer on page 4-75.
3-42
Fuel Gage
Here are some situations you may experience with your
fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the
fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the
ignition.
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible.
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fuel on
page 5-5.
3-43
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC display is located on the instrument panel
cluster above the steering column. The DIC can display
information such as the trip odometer, fuel economy
and personalization features.
C (Personalization): Press this button to change
personal settings of various features for your vehicle.
D (Select): Press this button to reset certain functions
and turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay the DIC will display the current driver (1 or 2)
and the information that was last displayed before the
engine was turned off.
A (Trip Information): Press this button to scroll
through the odometer, personal trip odometer, business
trip odometer, hourmeter, annual log and the timer.
B (Fuel Information): Press this button to scroll
through the current range, average fuel economy, instant
fuel economy and engine oil life.
3-44
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Pressing any of the four buttons will
acknowledge (clear) most current warnings or service
messages. Some warnings that cannot be
acknowledged (cleared) are: ENGINE OVERHEATED,
OIL PRESSURE LOW, REDUCED ENGINE POWER,
TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE. These warnings must
be dealt with immediately and therefore cannot
be cleared until the problem has been corrected.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the four buttons on the DIC. These buttons are
trip information, fuel information, personalization and
select. The button functions are detailed in the following.
Trip Information Button
Press the trip information button to scroll through the
ODOMETER, PERSONAL TRIP ON/OFF, BUSINESS
TRIP ON/OFF, HOURMETER, ANNUAL LOG and
TIMER. If the personal trip and/or the business trip are
set to ON, you will also be able to scroll through
more messages. See “Personal Trip” and “Business
Trip” next for more information.
Personal Trip
Turn PERSONAL TRIP on or off by pressing the select
button. When it is on, you will also be able to scroll
through the following by pressing the trip information
button:
• PERSONAL: XXXXXX.X MI — This shows the
current distance traveled since the last reset for the
personal trip odometer in either miles or kilometers.
• PERSONAL: XXXX.X GAL — This shows the
amount of fuel used for the personal trip.
• PERSONAL: XX.X MPG— This shows how many
miles per gallon of fuel your vehicle is getting for
the personal trip based on current and past driving
conditions.
• PERSONAL: AVG MPH — This shows the vehicle’s
average speed for the personal trip.
• PERSONAL: % ANNUAL — This shows the ratio of
personal trip miles to annual miles as a percent.
Business Trip
Turn Business TRIP on or off by pressing the select
button. When it is on, you will also be able to scroll
through the following by pressing the trip information
button:
• BUSINESS: XXXXXX.X MI — This shows the
current distance traveled since the last reset for the
business trip odometer in either miles or kilometers.
• BUSINESS: XXXX.X GAL — This shows the
amount of fuel used for the business trip.
• BUSINESS: XX.X MPG — This shows the amount
of fuel used for the business trip.
• BUSINESS: AVG MPH — This shows the vehicle’s
average speed for the business trip.
• BUSINESS: % ANNUAL — This shows the ratio of
business trip miles to annual miles as a percent.
3-45
To reset the personal or business trip information, do
the following: press and hold the select button for
two seconds while in one of the personal or business
trip modes. This will reset all of the information for
the personal or business trip.
You can also reset the PERSONAL: XX MI, or
BUSINESS: XX MI while they are displayed by pressing
the reset stem on the cluster. If you press and hold
the reset stem or select button for four seconds,
the display will show the distance traveled since the last
ignition cycle for the personal or business trip.
Odometer
Press the trip information button until ODOMETER
appears on the display. This shows the total distance
the vehicle has been driven in either miles or kilometers.
Pressing the reset stem located on the instrument
cluster with the vehicle off will also display the odometer.
Hourmeter
Press the trip information button to scroll to the
hourmeter. The hourmeter shows the total number of
hours the engine has run. Pressing and holding the reset
stem for about four seconds on the instrument cluster
will also display the hourmeter after the odometer
is displayed when the vehicle is off.
3-46
Annual Log
Press the trip information button to scroll to the annual
log. The annual log shows the mileage accumulated
since it was last reset. To reset the annual log,
press and hold the select button for two seconds.
Timer
The DIC can be used as a timer. Press the select
button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer. The
display will show the amount of time that has passed
since the timer was last reset (not including time
the ignition is off). Time will continue to be counted as
long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,
59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
the display will roll back to zero.
To stop the counting of time, press the select button
briefly while TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
button while TIMER is displayed.
Fuel Information Button
Average Fuel Economy
Use the fuel information button to scroll through the
range, average fuel economy, instant fuel economy and
the GM Oil Life System.
Press the fuel information button until AVG ECON
appears in the display. Average fuel economy is how
many miles per gallon your vehicle is getting based on
current and past driving conditions.
Fuel Range
Press the fuel information button until RANGE appears
to display the remaining distance you can drive
without refueling. It’s based on fuel economy and the
fuel remaining in the tank. The display will show LOW if
the fuel level is low.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
Press and hold the select button for two seconds while
AVG ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel
economy. Average fuel economy will then be calculated
starting from that point. If the average fuel economy is not
reset, it will be continually updated each time you drive.
Instant Fuel Economy
Press the fuel information button until INST ECON
appears in the display. Instant fuel economy is how
many miles per gallon your vehicle is getting at
the particular moment in time. The instant fuel economy
cannot be reset.
3-47
GM Oil Life System
Personalization Button
Press the fuel information button until ENGINE OIL LIFE
appears in the display. The GM Oil Life System shows
an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It will show
100% when the system is reset after an oil change. It
will alert you to change your oil on a schedule consistent
with your driving conditions.
You can program certain features to a preferred setting
for up to two people. Press the personalization button
to scroll through the following personalization features.
All of the personalization options may not be available
on your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on your DIC.
Always reset the engine oil life after an oil change. To
reset the Oil Life System use the fuel button to reach the
ENGINE OIL LIFE screen and then press and hold the
select button for five seconds while ENGINE OIL LIFE is
displayed. OIL LIFE RESET will appear on the display for
10 seconds to let you know the system is reset.
The DIC does not replace the need to maintain your
vehicle as recommended in the Maintenance Schedule
in this manual. Also, the oil change reminder will not
detect dusty conditions or engine malfunctions that may
affect the oil. Also, the oil change reminder does not
measure how much oil you have in your engine. So, be
sure to check your oil level often. See Engine Oil on
page 5-14.
3-48
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AUTOMATIC LOCKING
AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING
DELAYED LOCKING
REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK
ALARM WARNING TYPE
REMOTE UNLOCK FEEDBACK
HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT
PERIMETER LIGHTING
SEAT POSITION RECALL
EASY EXIT DRIVER SEAT
CURB VIEW ASSIST
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY UNITS (ENG/MET)
The default options for the above features were set
when your vehicle left the factory. The default options
are noted in the text following, but may have been
changed from their default state since then.
The driver’s preferences can be recalled by pressing the
unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
labeled 1 or 2 or by pressing the appropriate memory
button 1 or 2 located on the driver’s door.
Alarm Warning Type
Press the personalization button until ALARM
WARNING TYPE appears in the display. To select your
personalization for alarm warning type, press the
select button while ALARM WARNING TYPE is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlamps
will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is
active.
ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm
warning on activation.
ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flash
when the alarm is active.
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while your choice is displayed on
the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on alarm warning type see Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-16.
Automatic Locking
Press the personalization button until AUTOMATIC
LOCKING appears in the display. To select your
personalization for automatic locking, press the select
button while AUTOMATIC LOCKING is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
LOCK DOORS MANUALLY: The doors will not be
locked automatically.
LOCK DOORS WITH SPEED: The doors will lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp when
the alarm is active.
3-49
LOCK DOORS OUT OF PARK (default): The doors
will lock when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
Choose one of the three options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-9.
Automatic Unlocking
Press the personalization button until AUTOMATIC
UNLOCKING appears in the display. To select
your personalization for automatic unlocking, press the
select button while AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
UNLOCK ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
UNLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
UNLOCK DOORS MANUALLY: The doors will not be
unlocked automatically.
UNLOCK DRIVER IN PARK: The driver’s door will be
unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
3-50
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-9.
Delayed Locking
If your DIC does not have this feature, you can still
program the delayed locking feature. See Delayed
Locking on page 2-9 for more information.
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the keyless entry transmitter and a door or the liftgate is
open, the delayed locking feature will delay locking
the doors and tailgate until five seconds after the last
door is closed.
Press the personalization button until DELAYED
LOCKING appears in the display. To select your
personalization for delayed locking, press the select
button while DELAYED LOCKING is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
DELAYED LOCKING ON: The doors will not lock until
five seconds after the last door or the liftgate is
closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that the
delayed locking feature is in use. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the lock button
on the door or keyless entry transmitter a second time.
DELAYED LOCKING OFF: The doors will lock
immediately when pressing the power lock switch or the
lock button on the keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the two options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-9.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
SEAT POSITION RECALL ON REMOTE: The memory
seat position you saved will be recalled when you
unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
Choose one of the three options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on seat position recall see Memory Seat on
page 2-51.
Seat Position Recall
Perimeter Lighting
Press the personalization button until SEAT POSITION
RECALL appears in the display. To select your
personalization for seat position recall, press the select
button while SEAT POSITION RECALL is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
Press the personalization button until PERIMETER
LIGHTING appears in the display. To select your
personalization for perimeter lighting, press the select
button while PERIMETER LIGHTING is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
SEAT POSITION RECALL OFF (default): The memory
seat position you saved will only be recalled when the
memory button 1 or 2 is pressed.
PERIMETER LIGHTING ON (default): The headlamps
and back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, if it
is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
SEAT POSITION RECALL AT KEY IN: The memory
seat position you saved will be recalled when you
put the key in the ignition.
3-51
PERIMETER LIGHTING OFF: The perimeter lights will
not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the lock symbol
on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the two options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the lock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Remote Lock Feedback
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Press the personalization button until REMOTE LOCK
FEEDBACK appears in the display. To select your
personalization for the feedback you will receive when
locking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter, press the select button while REMOTE
LOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
the select button will scroll through the following choices:
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with the
lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter
and the horn will chirp the second time you press the
lock button.
LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when locking the vehicle.
3-52
Remote Unlock Feedback
Press the personalization button until REMOTE
UNLOCK FEEDBACK appears in the display. To select
your personalization for the feedback you will receive
when unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless
entry transmitter, press the select button while REMOTE
UNLOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with
the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the
horn will chirp the second time you press the unlock
button.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when unlocking the vehicle.
•
•
•
•
•
HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 60 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 120 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 180 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY OFF
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The amount of time you choose will be the amount of
time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off
the vehicle. If you choose off, the headlamps will turn
off as soon as you turn off the vehicle.
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Choose one of the seven options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Headlamps on at Exit
Curb View Assist
Press the personalization button until HEADLAMPS ON
AT EXIT appears in the display. To select your
personalization for how long the headlamps will stay on
when you turn off the vehicle, press the select button
while HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
Press the personalization button until CURB VIEW
ASSIST appears in the display. To select your
personalization for curb view assist, press the select
button while CURB VIEW ASSIST is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (default)
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC
CURB VIEW: OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
3-53
CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: DRIVER: The driver’s outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: BOTH: The driver’s and passenger’s
outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle
is shifted into REVERSE (R).
Choose one of the four options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on tilt mirror in reverse see Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb View Assist on
page 2-39.
3-54
Easy Exit Driver Seat
Press the personalization button until EASY EXIT
DRIVER SEAT appears in the display. To select your
personalization for seat position exit, press the
select button while EASY EXIT DRIVER SEAT is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exit recall
will occur.
EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will move to
the exit position when the key is removed from the
ignition.
Choose one of the two options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on seat position exit see Memory Seat on
page 2-51.
Display Units (ENG/MET)
Press the personalization button until DISPLAY UNITS
appears in the display. To select English or metric,
press the select button while DISPLAY UNITS is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
• UNITS: ENGLISH
• UNITS: METRIC
If you choose English, all information will be displayed
in English units. For example, distance in miles and fuel
economy in miles per gallon.
Choose one of the two options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and end out of the personalization options.
Display Language
To select your personalization for display language,
press the select button while DISPLAY LANGUAGE is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button
will scroll through the following languages:
• English
• French
• Spanish
Choose one of the three options and press the
personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
If you accidentally choose a language that you don’t
want or understand, press and hold the personalization
button and the trip information button at the same
time. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages
in their particular language. English will be in English,
French will be in French and so on. When you see
the language that you would like, release both buttons.
The DIC will then display the information in the
language you chose.
You can also scroll through the different languages by
pressing and holding the trip reset stem for four
seconds, as long as you are in the odometer mode.
Select Button
The select button is used to reset certain functions and
turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC display.
The select button also toggles through the options
available in each personalization menu. For example, this
button will reset the trip odometers, turn off the FUEL
LEVEL LOW message, and toggle through the languages
you can select the DIC to display information in.
3-55
DIC Warnings and Messages
CHECK OIL LEVEL
Warning messages are displayed on the DIC to notify
the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and
that some action may be needed by the driver to
correct the condition. If there is more than one message
that needs to be displayed they will appear one after
another. Some messages may not require immediate
action but you should press the select button to
acknowledge that you received the message and clear it
from the display. Some messages cannot be cleared
from the display because they are more urgent;
these messages require action before they can be
removed from the DIC display. The following are the
possible messages that can be displayed and some
information about them.
If the oil level in the vehicle is low, this message will
appear on the DIC. Check the oil level and correct it as
necessary. You may need to let the vehicle cool or
warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this message
will clear. Once the problem is corrected, pressing
the select button will clear this message from the DIC
display. This message will clear itself after 10 seconds
until the next ignition cycle.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL
This message is displayed when the engine oil needs to
be changed and service is required for your vehicle.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 and Engine
Oil on page 5-14 for more information. Also see “GM Oil
Life System” previously in this section for information
on how to reset the message. This message will
clear itself after 10 seconds until the next ignition cycle.
3-56
OIL LIFE RESET
This message will appear on the display for about
10 seconds after resetting the change engine oil
message.
OIL PRESSURE LOW
If low oil pressure levels occur, this message will be
displayed on the DIC and a chime will sound. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate
it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
If the cooling system temperature gets hot, this message
will appear in the DIC. Stop the vehicle and let the
engine idle in PARK (P) to allow the coolant to reach a
safe temperature. This message will clear when the
coolant temperature drops to a safe operating
temperature. Pressing the select button will clear it from
the DIC display.
This message is displayed when the cooling system
temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters
the engine coolant protection mode.
LOW COOLANT LEVEL
If your vehicle has a low coolant sensor and the engine
coolant level is low, this message will appear on the
DIC. Adding coolant will clear the message. This
message will clear itself after 10 seconds until the next
ignition cycle.
ENGINE OVERHEATED
See Engine Overheating on page 5-27 for further
information.
You may also see this message when the vehicle
determines a problem with the electronic throttle control.
See your dealer for service.
BATTERY NOT CHARGING
If the battery is not charging during operation, this
message will appear on the DIC. Driving with this
problem could drain your battery. Have the electrical
system checked as soon as possible. Pressing the
select button will clear it from the DIC display.
If the engine cooling system reaches unsafe
temperatures for operation, this message will appear in
the DIC and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe
damage. This message will clear when the engine
has cooled to a safe operating temperature.
3-57
SERVICE AIR BAG
SERVICE AIR SUSPENSION
If there is a problem with the air bag system, this
message will be displayed on the DIC. Have a qualified
technician inspect the system for problems. Pressing
the select button will clear it from the DIC display.
If a problem occurs with the suspension system, this
message will appear on the DIC. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed,
or appears again when you begin driving, the air
suspension system needs service.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
If a problem occurs with the brake system, this message
will appear on the DIC. If this message appears, stop
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
If the message is still displayed, or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service.
Pressing the select button will clear it from the
DIC display.
TURN SIGNAL ON
If a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the
off position. Pressing the select button will clear it from
the DIC display.
SERVICE 4WD
FUEL LEVEL LOW
If a problem occurs with the all–wheel drive system, this
message will appear on the DIC. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed,
or appears again when you begin driving, the four wheel
drive system needs service. Pressing the select button
will clear it from the DIC display.
If the fuel level is low, this message will appear on the
DIC and you will hear a chime. Refuel as soon as
possible. Pressing the select button will acknowledge
this message immediately and clear it from the DIC
display. It will also clear itself after 10 seconds. The low
fuel light near the fuel gage will still remain on in
either case.
3-58
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
TRANSMISSION HOT
If the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly this
message may appear along with the check engine light
on the instrument panel. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 3-38. Reinstall the fuel cap, making sure
to fully install the cap. See Filling Your Tank on
page 5-7. The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose
or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into
the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the light and message off.
If the transmission fluid temperature becomes high, the
message center will display this message.
CHECK WASHER FLUID
If the washer fluid level is low, this message will appear
on the DIC. Adding washer fluid will clear the message.
Pressing the select button will clear it from the DIC
display. This message will clear itself after 10 seconds
until the next ignition cycle.
When the transmission enters the protection mode, you
may notice a change in the transmission shifting
patterns. When the transmission fluid temperature
returns to normal, the display will turn off and the
transmission shifting patterns will return to normal.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while transmission
temperature warning is displayed.
TRACTION ACTIVE
When the traction control system has detected that any
of the vehicle’s wheels are slipping, the traction
control system will activate and this message will appear
on the DIC. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-9 for more information.
3-59
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Towing a trailer
Hot outside air temperatures
Hauling a large or heavy load
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler (if equipped).
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures
on a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for the proper transmission maintenance
intervals.
3-60
TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE
If the transmission fluid gets hot, this message will
appear on the DIC along with a continuous chime.
Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can
cause damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and
let it idle to allow the transmission to cool. This message
will clear and the chime will stop when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
If the driver’s door is not fully closed and the vehicle is
in a drive gear, this message will appear on the
display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for obstacles, and close the
door again. Check to see if the message still appears on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will clear it from
the DIC display.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
REAR ACCESS OPEN
If the passenger’s door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is in a drive gear, this message will appear on
the display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off
the vehicle, check the door for obstacles, and close
the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC. Pressing the select button will clear
it from the DIC display.
If the liftgate is open while the ignition is in RUN, this
message will appear on the DIC and you will hear
a chime. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate.
Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the
DIC display. Pressing the select button will clear it
from the DIC display.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is in a drive gear, this message will appear
on the display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn
off the vehicle, check the door for obstacles, and
close the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
clear it from the DIC display.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed and
the vehicle is in a drive gear, this message will
appear on the display and you will hear a chime. Stop
and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstacles,
and close the door again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC. Pressing the select button
will clear it from the DIC display.
REPLACE LIFTGATE FUSE
This message will be displayed if the liftgate lock
malfunctions and/or the liftgate fuse blows. For more
information on fuses, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-102.
If the message returns after replacing the fuse, see you
dealer for service.
KEYFOB X BATTERY LOW
If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low, this
message will appear on the DIC. The battery needs
to be replaced in the transmitter. Pressing the select
button will clear it from the DIC display.
3-61
Audio System(s)
Setting the Time
Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to
your vehicle – like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio – be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,
radio or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been added
improperly.
Your radio may have a button marked with an H or HR
to represent hours and an M or MN to represent
minutes.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with
it first. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle,
find out what your audio system can do and how to
operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio
system even after the ignition is turned off. See
“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under Ignition
Positions on page 2-19.
3-62
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
appears on the display. Press and hold the minute
button until the correct minute appears on the display.
The time may be set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until
RDS TIME appears on the display. To accept this
time, press and hold the hour and minute buttons, at the
same time, for another 2 seconds. If the time is not
available from the station, NO UPDAT will appear on the
display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. Once you have
tuned to an RDS broadcast station, it may take a
few minutes for your time to update.
Radio with Cassette and CD
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation as vehicle speed increases.
To turn automatic volume off, press this button until
AVOL OFF appears on the display.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Time display is available with the ignition turned off.
For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
3-63
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM. The display will show your selection.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM), by performing the following
steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
1. Turn the radio on.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3. Tune in the desired station.
q PSCAN r:
Press and hold either arrow for
more than two seconds. SCAN will appear on the
display and you will hear a beep. The radio will go to a
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return and the equalization that you
selected will be automatically stored for that
pushbutton.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow
for more than four seconds. PSCN will appear on
the display and you will hear two beeps. The radio will
go to the first preset station, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next preset station. Press either arrow
again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
q SEEK r:
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-64
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on
the display, you will hear a beep, and the display level
will be adjusted to the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for each
preset and source.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until
the radio produces one beep. The balance and fade
will be adjusted to the middle position and the display
will show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on
the display, you will hear a beep, and the display level
will be adjusted to the middle position.
If you radio is equipped with the Bose audio system,
your equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-65
Radio Data System (RDS)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the
following:
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-66
1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button or either SEEK arrow to
take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that PTY
and the PTY is displayed, press the SEEK TYPE
button once. If the PTY is not displayed, press
the SEEK TYPE button twice to display the PTY and
then to go to another station.
5. Press the P-TYPE knob to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
SCAN: You can scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.
You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) by
performing the following steps:
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin scanning
the stations in the PTY.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger
stations.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
3-67
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If a
cassette tape or CD is playing, play will stop during the
announcement. You will not be able to turn off alert
announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message at your own speed, press the INFO
button repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
the display with each press. Once the complete message
has been displayed, the information symbol will
disappear from the display until another new message is
received. The old message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button. You can view an old message until a
new message is received or a different station is tuned to.
3-68
When a message is not available from a station, NO
INFO will appear on the display.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned
radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements, the
radio will stop and TRAF will be displayed. When a
traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station
you will hear it. If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC
will appear on the display.
If TRAF is on the display you can press the TRAF
button to turn off the traffic announcements.
Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if the
volume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of a
cassette tape or a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts
traffic announcements.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): Your audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that your
radio has not been configured properly for the vehicle
and must be returned to the dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. You must return
to the dealer for service.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is
off, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. A
tape symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape is
inserted. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled sound,
the tape may not be in squarely. Press the eject button
to remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO, and
SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. TAPE
will appear on the display and an arrow showing which
side of the tape is playing. The tape player automatically
begins playing the other side when it reaches the
end of the tape.
If you want to insert a tape while the ignition is off, first
press the eject button or the DISPL knob. Cassette
tape adapter kits for portable CD players will work in
your cassette tape player.
Your tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for previous
to work. Press this pushbutton to go to the previous
selection on the tape if the current selection has been
playing for less than three seconds. If pressed when the
current selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the previous selection or
the beginning of the current selection, depending upon
the position on the tape. If pressed when the current
selection has been playing for more than 13 seconds, it
will go to the beginning of the current selection.
SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase the
number of selections to be searched back, up to -9.
3-69
2 NEXT: Your tape must have at least three seconds of
silence between each selection for next to work. Press
this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the tape. If
you press the pushbutton more than once, the player will
continue moving forward through the tape. SEEK and a
positive number will appear on the display.
q SEEK r: The right arrow is the same as the
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the
PREV pushbutton. If you hold either arrow or press it
more than once, the player will continue moving forward
or backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive
or negative number will appear on the display.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the
tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed.
The radio will play while the tape reverses. The
station frequency and REV will appear on the display.
You may select stations during reverse operation
by using TUNE and SEEK.
q PSCAN r: Press and hold either PSCAN arrow for
more than two seconds until PSCAN appears on the
display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to the next
selection, play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next
selection. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop
scanning. Your tape must have at least three seconds of
silence between each selection for scan to work.
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance
the tape rapidly. Press this pushbutton again to return to
playing speed. The radio will play while the tape
advances. The station frequency and FWD will appear
on the display. You may select stations during
forward operation by using TUNE and SEEK.
5 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side of
the tape.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a tape when it is
playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing. Eject may
be activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first.
3-70
Cassette Tape Messages
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If CHK TAPE appears on
the display, the tape will not play because of one of the
following errors:
• The tape is tight and the player cannot turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to turn the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your
tape may be damaged and should not be used in
the player. Try a new tape to make sure your player
is working properly.
• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
• The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-90.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player with your
cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature
on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, perform the following
steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for five
seconds. READY will appear on the display and
the tape symbol on the display will flash, indicating
the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette tape slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
The override feature will remain active until the eject
button is pressed.
If the cassette tape is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
3-71
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. The
CD symbol will appear on the display. If you want to
insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the eject
button or the DISPL knob.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on
the ignition or the radio, the CD will start playing, where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-72
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
beginning of the current track if it has been playing
for more than eight seconds. TRACK and the track
number will appear on the display. If you hold this
pushbutton or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving backward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release the pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release the pushbutton to play the
passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
q SEEK r:
Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current or to the previous track. Press the
right arrow to go to the start of the next track. If you
hold either arrow or press it more than once, the player
will continue moving backward or forward through
the CD.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time will appear on the display. To change the default
on the display (track or elapsed time), press the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette
tape or CD when listening to the radio. The inactive
tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to stop a CD when it is
playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
q PSCAN r: Press and hold either SCAN arrow for
more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the
display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to the next
track, play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track.
Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
3-73
CD Messages
Radio with Six-Disc CD
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-74
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOLUME: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease
volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation as vehicle speed increases.
To turn automatic volume off, press this button until
AVOL OFF appears on the display.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. Press
this knob with the ignition off to display the time.
To change the default on the display, press the RCL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
sSEEK t: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
sSCAN t: Press and hold either SCAN arrow
for two seconds until SC appears on the display and
you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for
a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will
appear on the display and you will hear a double
beep. The radio will go to a preset station stored on
your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow
again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-75
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM), by performing the following
steps:
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS,
MID, or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob
to increase or to decrease. The display will show
the bass, midrange, or treble level. If a station is weak
or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return and the equalization that you
selected will be automatically stored for that
pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to the middle
position, push the AUDIO knob. The radio will
produce one beep and adjust the display level to the
middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for each
preset and source.
If you radio is equipped with the Bose audio system,
your equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-76
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Radio Data System (RDS)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-77
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
To select and find a desired PTY perform the
following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the PTY and take you to
the PTY’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that PTY
and the PTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrow
once. If the PTY is not displayed, press either
SEEK arrow twice to display the PTY and then to
go to another station.
5. Press P-TYPE to exit program type select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the
P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY
you want to interrupt with. When selected, an asterisk
will appear beside that PTY on the display. You
may select multiple interrupts if desired. When you are
listening to a CD, the last selected RDS station will
interrupt play if that selected program type format
is broadcast.
SCAN: You can scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
3-78
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger
stations.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
Setting Preset PTYs
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.
You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) by
performing the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop
during the announcement. You will not be able to turn
off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message at your own speed, press
the INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words will
appear on the display with each press. Once the
complete message has been displayed, INFO will
disappear from the display until another new message
is received. The old message can be displayed by
pressing the INFO button. You can view an old message
until a new message is received or a different station
is tuned to.
3-79
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements, the
radio will stop and brackets will be displayed around
TRAF. When a traffic announcement comes on
the tuned radio station you will hear it. If no station is
found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, you
can then press the TRAF button to remove the
brackets or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to
go to a station that supports traffic announcements.
If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the
display.
Your radio will also interrupt the play of a CD if the last
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements and
the brackets are displayed.
3-80
Playing a CD
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
LOAD CD Z: Press the LOAD side of this button to
load CDs into the CD player. This CD player will
hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
button.
3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, to
turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. If you select an equalization setting for your
CD, it will be activated each time you play a CD.
The CD will begin to play automatically.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load
a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the light will begin flashing
again. Once the light stops flashing and turns green
you can load another CD. The CD player takes up to
six CDs. Do not try to load more than six.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When you have finished loading
CDs, with the radio on or off, press the LOAD side of the
LOAD CD button to cancel the loading function. The
radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. If more than one CD has been loaded,
a number for each CD will be displayed. If you select an
equalization setting for your CD, it will be activated
each time you play a CD.
The last CD loaded will begin to play automatically.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the light, located to the
right of the slot, will begin to flash and LOAD
ALL will appear on the display.
3-81
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button, then press the numbered pushbutton that
corresponds to the CD you want to play. A small bar will
appear under the CD number that is playing, and the
track number will appear on the display.
If an error appears on the radio display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
LOAD CD Z (Eject): Press the CD eject side of this
button to eject a single CD or multiple CDs. To eject the
CD that is currently playing, press and release this
button. To eject multiple CDs, press and hold this button
for two seconds. You will hear a beep and the light will
flash to let you know when a CD is being ejected.
REMOVE CD will appear on the display. You can now
remove the CD. If the CD is not removed, after
25 seconds, the CD will be automatically pulled back into
the receiver. If you try to push the CD back into the
receiver, before the 25 second time period is complete,
the receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the CD
several times before stopping.
3-82
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a CD
after you have tried to push it in manually. The receivers
25-second eject timer will reset at each press of eject,
which will cause the receiver to not eject the CD until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
Once the player stops and the CD is ejected, remove the
CD. After removing the CD, press the PWR knob off and
then on again. This will clear the CD-sensing feature and
enable CDs to be loaded into the player again.
{ REV (Reverse):
Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, you can repeat one track
or an entire CD. To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one
CD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one of
the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release the RDM button.
RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold RDM for more
than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization will be automatically set whenever you
play a CD. For more information on AUTO EQ, see
“AUTO EQ” listed previously in this section.
sSEEK t:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of the
current track, if more than ten seconds have passed.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you hold
either arrow or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
sSCAN t:
To scan one CD, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then
go on to the next track. Press either SCAN arrow again,
to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until CD SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then
go on to the next track. Press either SCAN arrow again,
to stop scanning.
3-83
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default
on the display (track or elapsed time), press the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD(s) is playing.
Using Song List Mode
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right
arrow button to locate the track that you want
to save. The track will begin to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save the
track into memory. When SONG LIST is pressed a
beep will be heard immediately. After two seconds
of continuously pressing SONG LIST, two beeps will
sound to confirm that the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
The six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save
more than 20 selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in
the order that they were saved.
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this section
for more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not appear on the display. If
S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST button
to turn it off.
3-84
You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK
SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will
return you to the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the following
steps:
To delete the entire song list, perform the following
steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press either SEEK SCAN arrow to select the
desired track to be deleted.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. A beep will be heard, followed
by two beeps after two seconds and a final beep will
be heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will
appear on the display indicating that the song
list has been deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
two seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed a beep
will be heard immediately. After two seconds of
continuously pressing the SONG LIST button,
two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track
has been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to the
song list, the track will be added to the end of the list.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.
3-85
CD Messages
Navigation/Radio System
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display, it
could be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-86
Navigation/Radio Display and Controls
Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation radio
system that includes Radio Data System (RDS)
with program type (PTY) selections that will seek out
the kind of music you want to listen to and XM™
Satellite Radio Service capabilities (48 contiguous US
states, if equipped). The radio system can also
communicate with your navigation system to broadcast
announcements on traffic, weather, and emergency
alert communications. For information on how to use this
system, see the “Navigation System” manual.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Rear Seat Audio Controls
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any
of the audio sources: radio, cassette tapes, or CDs,
depending on your vehicles options. However, the rear
seat passengers can only control the music sources
that the front seat passengers are not listening to. For
example, rear seat passengers may listen to a cassette
tape through headphones while the driver listens to
the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat
passengers have control of the volume for each set of
headphones. The front seat audio controls always
override the RSA controls.
The following functions are controlled by the RSA
system buttons:
P (Power):
Press this button to turn the rear seat
audio system on or off. The rear speakers will be muted
when the power is turned on unless your vehicle is
equipped with the Bose® audio system. You may
operate the rear seat audio functions even when the
primary radio power is off.
3-87
u (Volume):
Turn the knob to increase or to decrease
volume. The left knob controls the left headphone and
the right knob controls the right headphone.
SRC (Source): Press this button to select an audio
source: radio, cassette tape, or CD, depending on your
vehicles options.
x SEEK w:
While listening to FM1, FM2, or AM,
press the up or the down arrow to tune to the next or to
the previous station and stay there. If the front radio
is in use, you cannot seek through different stations.
While listening to a cassette tape, press the up or the
down arrow to hear the next or the previous selection. If
the cassette tape on the front radio is in use, you cannot
seek through different selections on a tape.
While listening to a CD, press the up arrow to hear the
next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go back to
the start of the current track if more than eight seconds
have played. If the CD player on the front radio is in use,
you cannot seek through different tracks.
PROG (Program): The front passengers must be
listening to something different for each of these
functions to work:
• Press this button to go to the preset radio stations
set on the pushbuttons on the main radio.
• When a cassette tape is playing, press this button
to go to the other side of the tape.
• When a CD is playing in the radio, press this button
to go back to the beginning of the CD.
• When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this
button to select the next CD.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning a
portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). If the
radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will not operate
and LOCKED will appear on the display.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, your radio will not operate
if stolen.
3-88
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
You can control certain radio functions using the buttons
on your steering wheel.
If a cassette tape is playing, press this button to play
the other side of the tape.
If a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this button
to go to the next available CD.
Q SOURCE R: Press this button to select FM1,
FM2, AM or a cassette tape or CD. The cassette or CD
must be loaded to play. Available loaded sources are
shown on the display as a tape or a CD symbol.
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous radio station and stay
there.
g (OnStar/Voice Recognition):
You can press this
button to interact with the OnStar® system. See the
OnStar® manual provided with your vehicle for more
information.
If a cassette tape or CD is playing, the player will
advance with the up arrow and reverse with the down
arrow.
Q VOLR (Volume): Press the up or the down arrow
to increase or to decrease volume.
PROG (Program): Press this button to play a station
you have programmed on the radio preset buttons
on the selected band.
3-89
Radio Reception
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
AM
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise.
FM
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN to
indicate that you have used your tape player for
50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this
message appears on the display, your cassette
tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes,
but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice
a reduction in sound quality, try a known good
cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault.
If this other cassette has no improvement in sound
quality, clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer.
3-90
When cleaning the cassette tape player with the
recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it is
possible that the cassette may eject, because the cut
tape detection feature on your radio may recognize it as
a broken tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning
cassette from being ejected, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for five
seconds. READY will appear on the display and
the cassette symbol will flash for five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to
clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will
not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner
may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type
cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type
cleaning cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold the eject
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
The radio will display --- or CLEANED to show the
indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut
tape detection feature is active again.
3-91
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Fixed Mast Antenna
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand.
If the mast is badly bent, you should replace it.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due
to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth
and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray
directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or
too long on the video screen.
3-92
Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightened.
Chime Level Adjustment
The volume level of the vehicle’s chimes can be
controlled by the radio. To change the volume level,
press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the
radio power off. The chime volume level will change
from the normal level to loud, and LOUD will appear on
the display. To change back to the default or normal
setting, press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The chime
level will change from the loud level to normal, and
NORMAL will appear on the display.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-6
Braking .........................................................4-6
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-9
Locking Rear Axle ........................................4-11
Steering ......................................................4-12
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-14
Passing .......................................................4-14
Loss of Control .............................................4-16
Off-Road Driving ...........................................4-17
Driving at Night ............................................4-41
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-43
City Driving ..................................................4-46
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-47
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-48
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-49
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-50
Winter Driving ..............................................4-52
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...4-56
Towing ..........................................................4-65
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-65
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-65
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-67
Selectable Extended Rear Ride Height .............4-73
Electronically Controlled Air Suspension
System ....................................................4-74
Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-75
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-75
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-16.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
4-2
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,
reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
4-3
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into
the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might
not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness
and judgment can be affected by even a
small amount of alcohol. You can have a
serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive
after drinking. Please do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride
home in a cab; or if you are with a group,
designate a driver who will not drink.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering
and the accelerator. All three systems have to do their
work at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that
is only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving
at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping
enough space between your vehicle and others is
important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. Also see Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-34.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-8
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose
traction. When this happens, the system applies the
brakes to limit wheel spin.
The Traction Control System may operate on dry roads
under some conditions. When this happens, you
may notice a reduction in acceleration or a pumping
sound. This is normal and doesn’t mean there’s a
problem with your vehicle. Examples of these conditions
include hard acceleration in a turn, an abrupt upshift
or downshift of the transmission or driving on
rough roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TCS begins
to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control. See
“Cruise Control” under Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 3-6.
4-9
Another feature of this system is the Traction Control 2
(TC2) mode. TC2 should be selected for improved
traction and system performance when the vehicle is on
loose surfaces such as deep sand or mud.
To enter this mode,
press the TC2 button
located on the instrument
panel to the right of
the steering wheel.
TC2 only operates in the following transfer case modes:
• 4HI Lock
• 4LO Lock
• 4LO Lock and Rear Axle Lock
See Locking Rear Axle on page 4-11 for more
information on the rear axle lock.
4-10
It will not operate in 4HI. If the TC2 button is pressed
while in 4HI, the light will flash for about 15 seconds and
then go out. The light should also come on briefly
when you turn the ignition key to RUN; if it doesn’t see
your dealer for service.
If you restart your engine, the system reverts to the
standard TCS mode.
The traction off light will
come on when a Traction
Control System or
Anti-Lock Brake System
problem has been detected
and the vehicle needs
service. See Traction Off
Light on page 3-35.
When the traction off light is on, adjust your driving
accordingly.
The traction control system, as delivered from the
factory, will automatically come on whenever you start
your vehicle.
Locking Rear Axle
You must wait for the light in the button to stop flashing
and remain illuminated before the rear axle is locked.
The locking rear axle can give your vehicle additional
traction from the rear wheels when traveling in off-road
situations such as mud, snow, sand, steep hills and
uneven terrain.
The button used to turn
this feature on or off is
located above the transfer
case buttons to the
right of the steering wheel.
To lock the rear axle, do the following:
Notice: If you try to lock the rear axle while
your vehicle is stuck and the tires are spinning, you
could damage your vehicle’s drivetrain. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Always lock the rear axle before attempting
situations and/or navigating terrain which could
possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck.
The locking rear axle will be disengaged when the
vehicle’s speed is greater than 20 mph (32 km/h), if the
vehicle’s battery is low and/or the transfer case is
shifted out of 4LO Lock mode.
Notice: If you lock the rear axle while driving on
pavement, you could damage your vehicle’s
drivetrain. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not use the locking rear axle on
pavement. If you need four-wheel drive when
traveling on pavement, use only 4HI.
1. Place the transfer case in the 4LO Lock mode. This
is the only mode which will allow the rear axle to
lock. See All-Wheel Drive on page 2-25 for
more information regarding the transfer case and
4LO Lock mode.
2. Press the button with the vehicle stopped or moving
less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
4-11
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
4-12
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can not; there is not
room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. See Braking on
page 4-6. It is better to remove as much speed as you
can from a possible collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-13
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are
driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-14
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a “running start” that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
(Remember that if your right outside mirror is
convex, the vehicle you just passed may seem to
be farther away from you than it really is.)
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
4-15
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
4-16
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration
or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Off-Road Driving
Before You Go Off-Roading
This off-road guide is meant to provide advice for when
you drive your vehicle off paved roads. Also, see
Braking on page 4-6.
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields are properly attached. Make sure any
equipment you may need (first aid kit, cell phone,
flashlight, etc.) is securely stored in the vehicle. Be sure
you read all the information about your four-wheel-drive
vehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is the
spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where
they should be? What are the local laws that apply
to off-roading where you will be driving? If you do not
know, you should check with law enforcement people in
the area. Will you be on someone’s private land? If
so, be sure to get the necessary permission.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are not
marked. Curves are not banked. There are no
road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or
downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that
is why it is very important that you read this guide. You
will find many driving tips and suggestions. These
will help make your off-road driving safer and more
enjoyable.
4-17
“U” Type Assist Steps
The following instructions show how to install the
optional “U” steps. If you want to remove them, just
reverse the instructions:
1. Start with the side step brackets pointing up and
away from you. Or just make sure the HUMMER
logo faces up.
Your vehicle may be equipped with removable
side steps.
Remove the steps prior to off roading to give your
vehicle more ground clearance and to prevent damage
to the vehicle from the side steps dragging and/or
catching on obstacles.
Notice: Do not drive off road with the side steps
attached to your vehicle. You can damage the side
steps and/or your vehicle’s frame if they get
caught or drag against an obstacle. This damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
Always remove the side steps prior to any off road
driving.
4-18
2. For the front step, use the first and third brackets
on the vehicle from the front tire. For the rear step,
use the first and third brackets on the vehicle
from the rear tire.
You will notice that the side steps have pins on
both sides of the step brackets. This is because the
steps are interchangeable between front/back
and the driver/passenger sides of the vehicle. Use
the pins as follows:
• Driver Side: Look at the side step with the
HUMMER logo facing you. You will use the pins
which are on the right side of each side step
bracket. This works for the front or rear of
the vehicle.
• Passenger Side: Look at the side step with the
HUMMER logo facing you. You will use the pins
which are on the left side of each side step
bracket. This works for the front or rear of the
vehicle.
3. Guide the pins on the side step brackets into the
holes in the vehicle’s rocker panel protector
brackets. If you have difficulty doing this, it may
help to have someone hold up the step while you
guide the pins into the holes.
You will be guiding three pins into the holes with
the fourth hole in the vehicle’s rocker panel protector
brackets empty until the next step.
4. Thread the knob through the remaining hole — first
into the rocker panel protector and then into the
threaded hole in the assist step bracket.
If you thread the knob into the step and then the
rocker panel protector, you may think the step
is secure. It will fall out this way. To be sure the step
is secure, try moving the step left and right after
installing the knob.
Notice: Threading the knob into the step and then
into the rocker panel will not secure the assist
step. The step could fall off the vehicle and be
damaged. Always thread the knob through the
rocker panel first.
4-19
6. Once the knob is
torqued, install the
cotter pin through the
hole (see arrow) in
the end of the knob’s
threaded shaft.
This will help prevent the knob from coming completely
loose and falling out.
5. Hand-tighten the knob by turning it clockwise until it
is seated against the rocker panel protector bracket
and then tighten it to 10 lb ft (13.5 Y) with a
wrench as shown.
4-20
Tubular Assist Steps
To install a step:
1. Before installing the bolts:
• Remove all traces of the original adhesive patch.
• Clean the threads of the bolts with denatured
alcohol or equivalent and allow threads to dry.
• Apply Threadlocker (GM Part No. 12345382, in
Canada 10953489) or equivalent.
2. Install the assist step to the vehicle. You may need
someone to assist you in the installation.
3. Install the nuts and bolts for the two inner brackets
first, but do not tighten them.
4. Using a level, make sure the step is level in
relationship to the vehicle. Then, tighten the
inner bracket nuts and bolts.
5. Install the other nuts and bolts. Tighten all nuts and
bolts to 39 lb ft (50 Y).
The driver’s side of the vehicle is shown with the body
removed for clarity. To remove a step:
1. Remove the nuts and bolts attaching the step to the
vehicle.
2. Remove the step from the vehicle.
4-21
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
CAUTION:
• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items in the
rear area, as far forward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
•
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
CAUTION:
4-22
(Continued)
You will find other important information in this manual.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-67 and Tires
on page 5-60.
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
• Always use established trails, roads and areas that
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment — shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses — or
disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground).
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch
can be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to know
how to use it properly.
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
camp stoves and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from the
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-23
High Mobility Characteristics
The HUMMER H2 has a 10 inch (25.4 cm) running
groung clearance (A) and a 9 inch (22.8 cm) axle
to ground clearance (B) while maintaining a low
silhouette and a low center of gravity.
4-24
The HUMMER H2 has an approximate approach
angle (A) of 42° and a departure angle (B) of 37°,
depending on suspension packages.
Design specifications required a minimum gradeability of
60% (31°) slope, with the vehicle fully loaded, on high
friction surfaces at 6 mph (9.7 km/h). The vehicle
is expected to traverse this grade only for short
durations. Never stop and idle the vehicle or park it
on this grade.
4-25
Also, specifications required that the HUMMER H2 be
able to traverse a 40% (22°) side slope at 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) while fully loaded on high friction surfaces.
4-26
The HUMMER H2 can climb a 16 inch (40.6 cm)
vertical step. Step climbing is best done by approaching
the step at an angle rather than straight on.
Brake and Throttle Operation
Techniques for Off-Road Driving
For logs, walls, rocks, severe ditches, hills, sand, etc.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Do not
overspeed the engine.
2. Select the proper transmission and transfer case
gear range; usually FIRST (1) gear, 4LO LOCK for
such obstacles.
3. If wheel spin is experienced, maintain steady
throttle, with your foot off the brake pedal, to
allow the TCS to control the wheel spin. TCS will
not operate if the brakes are applied, even slightly.
4. If wheel spin can not be controlled by the system,
fully press the brake pedal with your left foot so all
wheel spin is halted.
5. Back away from the obstacle such that a new
approach can be tried.
For mounds, washouts, loose up-hill slopes,
ditches, etc.
6. As the first wheel crosses the obstacle, be prepared
to modulate the brake and throttle to maintain
control and avoid tire drop-off from obstacles.
Repeat the controlled process for the other wheels.
4-27
When wheel spin occurs as the vehicle is moving, the
driver may notice a slight shaking or shuddering of
the vehicle. This should be stopped as soon as possible
to prevent damage to vehicle components. This is the
indication that a loss of traction is occuring on this
terrain. The operator should:
1. Reduce throttle, brake wheels.
2. Assess the terrain properly and adjust vehicle
speed and gear ranges accordingly: 4HI position
for higher speeds and 4LO LOCK for more torque
and lower speeds. Transmission FIRST (1) gear
is generally recommended.
3. Apply slight pressure to the brake when the shaking
or shuddering sensation is felt, keeping the vehicle
moving in a controlled manner.
4. Be prepared to modulate the brake and throttle
through the adverse terrain.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen
4-28
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet and body, you will need to respond
to vibrations and vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
• you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• you have less time to react.
• you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
• you will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you’re
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things to
consider.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer braking
distances.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
(There is more discussion of these subjects later.)
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you are not prepared.
When possible, it is a good practice to survey the
landscape ahead on foot prior to driving to observe
hidden obstacles.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you can not control the
vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You
could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. See Drunken Driving on page 4-3.
4-29
Crossing Obstacles
Approach Angle — a Key to Mobility. If you encounter a
large dip in the terrain, do not enter straight on; enter
at an angle — 15° minimum approach (A), 75° maximum
approach angle (B). For very large dips, ditches or
small washes, coast in, using the engine as a brake
(transmission and transfer case lowest gears). Then, use
the low ranges in the transmission and transfer case
to power out.
4-30
Roll Your Tires Over Large
Rocks. Do not straddle
large rocks; drive
over them, letting the tire
envelop the rock. The
tread of the tire is thicker
and tougher than the
sidewall of the tire and is
more resilient to impact
than underbody
components.
Log Crossing. Using the proper technique, the
HUMMER H2 will cross logs up to 10 inches (25.4 cm) in
diameter. Approach the log at approximately a 15° angle
(A) with the transmission in FIRST (1) and the transfer
case in 4LO LOCK and “walk” the HUMMER H2 over,
one tire at a time. As with all obstacles, face your tires
perpendicular to the object for best traction and tire life. It
may be necessary to modulate your brake pedal and
accelerator to avoid spin-out. Ease the vehicle down from
the log with your brake.
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can
not do. There are some hills that simply can not be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you can not control your speed. If
you drive across them, you will roll over. You
could be seriously injured or killed. If you have
any doubt about the steepness, do not drive
the hill.
4-31
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where
you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,
the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but
you may not see this because the crest of the hill
is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
4-32
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to
find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
• Use transmission and transfer case low gear and
get a firm grip on the steering wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want your wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
• Let the traction system work to control any wheel
slippage. TC2 is designed to allow moderate
wheel spin with some capability to dig in and power
up the hill.
• Do not continue if the vehicle shudders or exhibits
suspension hopping. This can cause damage to
the driveline or suspension components. Improper
driving technique is not covered by your vehicle
warranty
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use your headlamps even during the day. They
make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
{CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
4-33
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or
is about to stall, and I can not make it up
the hill?
A:
If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here is what you should do:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and
keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the
parking brake.
• If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
• If your engine has stopped running, you will need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in
REVERSE (R).
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way, you will be able to tell if your wheels are
straight and maneuver as you back down. It is
best that you back down the hill with your wheels
straight rather than in the left or right direction.
Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
4-34
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or
are about to stall, when going up a hill.
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to “rev-up” the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.
Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you can
not make it up the hill, you must back straight
down the hill.
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the
hill and decide I just can not do it. What should
I do?
A:
Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle
would take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL when you leave
the vehicle. Leave it in some gear.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). This is because
the NEUTRAL position on the transfer case
overrides the transmission. You or someone
else could be injured. If you are going to leave
your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift
the transmission to PARK (P). But do not shift
the transfer case to NEUTRAL. Leave the
transfer case in the 4 HI, 4 HI Lock or 4 LO
Lock position.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes
and they will not have to do all the work. Descend
slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
{CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This
could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
4-35
Q: Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
A:
Yes! These are important because if you ignore
them you could lose control and have a serious
accident.
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you do not drive
straight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.”
Your brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. But if
it happens going downhill, here is what to do.
• Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
• Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
• Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
• If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
4-36
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to
decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here
are some things to consider:
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up
or down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the
distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels)
reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble
end over end. But when you drive across an incline,
the much more narrow track width (the distance
between the left and right wheels) may not prevent
the vehicle from tilting and rolling over. Also,
driving across an incline puts more weight on the
downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you
drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots,
or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip
sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, it
can hit something that will trip it (a rock, a rut,
etc.) and roll over.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock
with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels
drop into a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilt
even more.
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should I do?
A:
If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because
the trail goes across the incline does not mean you
have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have
rolled over.
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
4-37
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you
get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
4-38
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could
be crushed or killed. Always get out on the
uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well
clear of the rollover path.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels will
not get good traction. You can not accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need longer
braking distances.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do
not get stuck. Be careful to keep mud from building
up and washing onto the engine cooling system.
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as
on beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink
into the sand. This has an effect on steering,
accelerating and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
{CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
you and your passengers could drown. Drive
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
4-39
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
{CAUTION:
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,
axles or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will
not get through. Also, water that deep can damage
your axle and other vehicle parts. Your vehicle is
capable of depths up to 20 inches. Know how to judge
whether the water is deeper than this before
proceeding into it.
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle
downstream and you and your passengers
could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can
still wash away the ground from under your
tires, and you could lose traction and roll
the vehicle over. Do not drive through
rushing water.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition
system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also
occur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long
as your tailpipe is under water, you will never be
able to start your engine. When you go through water,
remember that when your brakes get wet, it may
take you longer to stop.
4-40
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-43 for
more information on driving through water.
After Off-Road Driving
Driving at Night
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the engine and oil
coolers for mud accumulation. Thoroughly and carefully
clean these devices to allow proper cooling. Check
the body structure, steering, suspension, wheels, tires
and exhaust system for damage. Also, check the
fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-41
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you can not see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
4-42
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
And, if your tires do not have much tread left, you will get
even less traction. It is always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can not stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on dry roads.
4-43
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can not, try to slow down before you
hit them.
4-44
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you can not avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-60.
4-45
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-47.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-46
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
4-47
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
4-48
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you will find experienced and able service experts in
GM dealerships all across North America. They will be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or
whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-49
Hill and Mountain Roads
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Off-Road
Driving on page 4-17 for information about driving
off-road.
4-50
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transmission, and you can climb the
hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-51
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if
you will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-60.
4-52
Your Traction Control System will help you to maintain
control of the vehicle when you accelerate on a
slippery road. If you are driving in deep snow, turn your
traction system to the TC2 mode. It will improve your
ability to accelerate. See If You Are Stuck: In Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-56. Even though your
vehicle has a traction system, you will want to slow down
and adjust your driving to the road conditions. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you
will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
What is the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is
about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow — drive with caution.
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can not reach:
around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or
an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead
of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
4-53
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
4-54
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You can not see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
4-55
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you are stuck, but
you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transmission or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For more information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-75.
4-56
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Your vehicle
has a Traction Control System that will activate when the
system senses that the wheels are spinning. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more
information. Then, with the wheels straight ahead, shift
back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release
the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is
in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking
motion that may free your vehicle. If that does not get
you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
Or, you can use your recovery loops. If you do need
to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-65.
Using the Recovery Loops
Your vehicle may be
equipped with recovery
loops at the front and rear
of your vehicle. You
may need to use them if
you are stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to
some place where you can
continue driving.
Rear of Vehicle
Front of Vehicle
4-57
{CAUTION:
These loops, when used, are under a lot of
force. Keep people away from the vicinity of
the loops and any chains or cables during use.
Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull
on the loops at a sideways angle. The loops
could break off and you or others could be
injured from the chain or cable snapping back.
Notice: Never use the recovery loops to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
4-58
First Aid Kit and Tool Kit
Your vehicle may have a first aid kit and/or a tool kit
located in the storage bin behind the spare tire. They are
held in place with a hook and loop fastener strap.
If your vehicle has the tool kit, the kit includes a
flashlight, a tire pressure gage and a multi-purpose
tool set.
4-59
Front Receiver
The tire pressure gage has
a reset button in the gage
stem. After taking a
pressure reading, press
the button to reset
the gage to zero.
Your vehicle is equipped with a front receiver.
You can use the receiver with a power winch platform
(described later in this section), receiver extension
or with other accessories.
Never use the front receiver to tow a trailer.
You can use the front receiver to tow your vehicle
behind another. See Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 4-65.
4-60
Receiver Extension (If Equipped)
Use the receiver extension with the front receiver and
various light-duty accessories such as bike racks.
To use the front receiver with the receiver extension, do
the following:
Notice: Do not attach accessories or cargo that
weigh more than 240 lbs. (108 kg) to the receiver
extension. You could damage the receiver extension
and/or your vehicle’s frame components.
The receiver extension was not intended for heavy-duty
use, such as trailer towing, winching or vehicle
recovery.
1. Locate the receiver extension (A) in the rear of the
vehicle where it is attached to the spare tire
mounting plate.
2. Loosen the wing nuts (B) holding the extension to
the spare tire plate and remove it.
3. The extension attaches to the front receiver exactly
as the power winch platform does. See “Power
Winch Platform” following in this section.
4. Attach the accessory you will be using to the
receiver extension.
4-61
Power Winch Platform (If Equipped)
You can use the power winch platform with an
aftermarket winch. Connect the winch to the platform
and wiring to the vehicle following the winch
manufacturer’s guidelines.
If you look under the
receiver, you will see the
locking portion (clip) of the
pin coming through the
bottom hole in the receiver.
1. Slide the winch platform into the front receiver of
your vehicle. To secure it, follow the next step.
You will be using the locking pin (if equipped) stored
with the jack/tool kit. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-79 for more information on location.
3. Turn the clip so that it is
perpendicular to the
pin. Pin is shown off the
vehicle for clarity.
2. Slide the pin down through the hole in the front
bumper and into the receiver.
4-62
4. Push the clip so it
locks in place. Pin is
shown off the
vehicle for clarity.
To remove the winch platform, you must first unlock the
clip so you can pull out the pin. To unlock the clip,
squeeze the clip and turn it so it is in line with the rest
of the pin. Remove the pin and slide the winch platform
out from the receiver.
Notice: Do not use the winch platform to winch at
a tension of more than 9,000 lbs. (4 082 kg). This
would damage your vehicle’s frame. This damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
5. With the clip locked
and the pin secure,
your setup should look
like this if you look
under the receiver. The
pin is now secure
and you will be able to
use the winch.
4-63
If you are using a winch to pull out another vehicle,
follow the winch manufacturer’s guidelines and observe
the following to prevent damage to your vehicle:
• If possible, have your vehicle anchored from the
opposite side of the winch to a solid, immovable
object.
If winching from the front, use both of the rear
recovery loops. If winching from the rear, use both
of the front recovery loops.
• Put your transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
• Use your regular brakes to hold your vehicle in
place and block the wheels to keep the vehicle
from moving.
Notice: Using a power winch with the transmission
in gear to pull out another vehicle may damage
the transmission. When operating a power winch,
always leave the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
Notice: Driving your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with the winch installed, can cause
damage to your vehicle and the car wash. Always
remove the winch from your vehicle before using an
automatic car wash. See Cleaning the Outside of
Your Vehicle on page 5-95 for more information.
4-64
If you are using a winch to pull out your own vehicle,
follow the winch manufacturer’s guidelines for self
recovery and observe the following to prevent damage
to your vehicle:
• Do not self recover your vehicle by wrapping the
winch cable around an object (such as a pulley
block or tree) and attaching it back to your vehicle’s
recovery loops.
• Always attach the winch cable directly to a solid
anchor directly in front of your vehicle to achieve
a straight line pull.
Towing
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Towing Your Vehicle
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
Recreational Vehicle Towing
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”).
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-48.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
4-65
Dinghy Towing
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
{CAUTION:
1. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See
All-Wheel Drive on page 2-25 for the proper
procedure to select the NEUTRAL position for
your vehicle.
6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle. You can use your vehicle’s front mounted
receiver with the proper accessories to tow it.
See “Front Mounted Receiver” under If You Are
Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-56.
7. Turn the engine off and leave the steering column
unlocked.
4-66
Shifting an all-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in Park (P). You
or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL.
Dolly Towing
Your vehicle can not be dolly towed. If you must tow
your vehicle behind another, use the dinghy towing
procedure listed previously.
Notice: Dolly towing your vehicle will damage
drivetrain components. Do not dolly tow your
vehicle.
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
The Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the center pillar, near the driver’s door latch. Vehicles
without a center pillar will have the Tire and Loading
Information label attached to the driver’s door edge. This
label lists the number of people that can be in your
vehicle and the total weight it can carry. This weight is
called the vehicle capacity weight.
4-67
The Tire and Loading Information label also tells you
the size and recommended inflation pressure for
the original equipment tires on your vehicle. For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-60
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-68.
If your vehicle does not have the Tire and Loading
Information label, the Certification/Tire label shows the
tire size and recommended inflation pressures
needed to obtain the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
the front and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds” on your vehicle placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
4-68
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs.).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
See Towing a Trailer on page 4-75 for important
information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and
trailering tips.
Example 1
Example 2
Loading Your Vehicle
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
Item
Description
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
1,000 lbs.
(453 kg)
Total
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
1,000 lbs.
(453 kg)
Total
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs.
(68 kg) × 2 =
300 lbs. (136 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs.
(68 kg) × 5 =
750 lbs. (340 kg)
C
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
700 lbs. (317 kg)
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
250 lbs. (113 kg)
4-69
Certification/Tire Label
Example 3
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
1,000 lbs.
(453 kg)
Total
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs.
(91 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs.
(453 kg)
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
0 lbs. (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-70
The Certification/Tire label is found on the rear edge of
the driver’s door.
The label shows the size of your original tires and the
inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Your warranty does not cover parts or components that
fail because of overloading.
The label will help you decide how much cargo and
installed equipment your truck can carry.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
CAUTION:
(Continued)
4-71
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
If you put things inside your vehicle – like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else – they go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
4-72
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle
for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road Driving on
page 4-17.
Add-On Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need to put
a limit on how many people you can carry inside
your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you
buy and install the new equipment.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-67.
The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximum
weight of the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t
include the weight of the people inside. But you
can figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat.
The total cargo load must not be more than your
vehicle’s CWR.
Selectable Extended Rear Ride
Height
If your vehicle has this feature it comes as part of the
electronically controlled air suspension system.
The selectable rear ride height allows you to raise the
rear of the vehicle about 2 inches (5 cm) over the normal
ride height. This can be helpful when driving off-road
where you may need more ground clearance to clear
an obstacle.
The button that controls
this feature is located on
the instrument panel to the
right of the steering wheel.
To use this feature, ensure that the following conditions
are met:
• The engine must be running.
• All doors must be fully closed. The suspension will
not raise or lower if a door is open.
• The vehicle speed must be less than 40 mph
(64 km/h). The system will not activate otherwise.
Press the height control button to raise the rear of the
vehicle.
A light in the button will begin to flash as the rear of the
vehicle rises. Once the extended height has been
reached (this may take up to a minute), the warning
light will stop flashing and will stay lit while the vehicle is
at the extended height.
To lower the vehicle to the normal ride height, press the
button again. The light in the button will flash as the
suspension lowers. When the light in the button stops
flashing and goes out, the suspension has reached
the normal ride height.
This feature will lower the vehicle to the normal height if
vehicle speed exceeds 40 mph (64 km/h).
You may also want to use this feature when ascending,
descending or cresting a steep hill as this can help
prevent the rear bumper from dragging on the base of
the hill or prevent the vehicle from grounding out
(high centering) on the crest of the hill.
Do not use this feature when towing a trailer.
4-73
Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension System
The electronically controlled air suspension, if equipped,
keeps the rear of your vehicle level as you load and
unload it. The system includes a compressor, two height
sensor and two air springs supporting the vehicle.
The engine must be running for the system to operate
and level the vehicle after loading or unloading. The
system will suspend leveling if any of the doors and/or
the liftgate are open. Once the doors are closed,
system leveling will continue.
You may hear the compressor running when you load
your vehicle, and periodically as the system adjusts
the vehicle to the standard ride height. You may
also hear the release of air similar to a hissing sound
during suspension operation. This is normal.
Load leveling will not function normally with the inflator
hose attached to the inflator outlet. Remove the
inflater hose from the outlet when it is not in use. See
Accessory Inflator on page 5-76.
4-74
Overload and Overheat Protection
Overload protection is designed to protect the air
suspension system and is an indication to the driver that
the vehicle is overloaded.
If the rear suspension remains at a low height, the rear
axle load has exceeded GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating). When the overload protection mode is activated,
the compressor operates for about 30 seconds to one
minute without raising the vehicle depending on the
amount of overload. This will continue each time
the ignition is turned on until the rear axle load is
reduced below GAWR.
If the total rear GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is
reached, the suspension may be slightly less than level.
This is normal and does not mean there is a problem
with the air suspension.
If the system overheats, it will shut down and stop all
leveling functions until the system cools down.
During this time the SERVICE AIR SUSPENSION
message will appear in the DIC. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-44 for more information.
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch loads from the Cargo
Weight Rating (CWR). CWR is the maximum weight of
the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t include
the weight of the people inside. But you can figure about
150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat. The total cargo load
must not be more than your vehicle’s CWR.
Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached, so that you
won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. If you are using
a weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without the
spring bars in place.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-75.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section.
4-75
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, accelleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
4-76
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts
too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions). See “Tow/Haul Mode” following.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/haul is designed to assist while your vehicle is
pulling a large or heavy load or trailer. Tow/haul is most
useful while pulling such a load in rolling terrain, in
stop-and-go traffic, or when you need improved
low-speed control, such as when parking. The purpose
of the tow/haul mode is to do the following:
Press the button on the
instrument panel to the
right of the steering
wheel to enable the
tow/haul mode.
• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.
• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when
the vehicle is unloaded.
• Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
Tow/haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75% of the
vehicle’s Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR).
See “Weight of the Trailer” later in this section.
A light on the instrument
panel will illuminate to
indicate that tow/haul
mode has been selected.
Press the button again to turn off tow/haul. The indicator
light on the instrument panel will turn off. The vehicle will
automatically turn off tow/haul every time it is started.
Driving with tow/haul activated without a heavy load or
with no trailer will cause reduced fuel economy and
unpleasant engine and transmission driving
characteristics, but will not cause damage.
4-77
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Use one of the following charts to determine how much
your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle
model and options.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
*Maximum Trailer
Axle Ratio
Weight
**GCWR
6000 V8
4.10
6,700 lbs. (3 039 kg)
13,500 lbs. (6 123 kg)
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) in the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Engine
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
Booklet.
4-78
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight of
your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in
it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you
have a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in
your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle
can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight your
vehicle can tow. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-67 for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to a
maximum of 500 lbs (227 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up
to a maximum of 700 lbs (318 kg) with a weight
distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongion the hitch
ball closest to the vehicle. This will help reduce the
effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights
are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them
right simply by moving some items around in the
trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-67. Then be
sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
If you use a weight distributing hitch, make sure you
don’t go over the rear axle limit before you apply
the weight distribution spring bars.
4-79
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Weight-distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so that the distance (A) remains the
same both before and after coupling the trailer to the
tow vehicle.
If you ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh
more than 4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg) be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
when driving. You should always use a sway control
if your trailer will weigh more than these limits. You can
ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Always leave just enough slack so you can
turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
(A) Body-to-Ground Distance (B) Front of Vehicle
4-80
Trailer Brakes
Driving with a Trailer
If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,
adjust and maintain them properly.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
• The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap at
the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid
to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for this.
If you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use steel
brake tubing.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
4-81
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Passing
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
4-82
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g.,
under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if the
transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/Haul Mode”
earlier.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get
the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-27.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-83
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
Trailer Wiring Harness
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections
before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-84
Your vehicle is equipped with a trailer towing harness.
This harness with a seven-pin universal heavy-duty
trailer connector is attached to a bracket on the hitch
platform.
The Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) wire is
tied next to the trailer wiring harness for use with a
trailer.
The trailer towing harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White: Ground
A jumper harness for an electric trailer brake controller
and a trailer battery feed fuse may be included with
this trailering package. See “Instrument Panel Jumper
Wiring Harness” later in this section.
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
four-way, round pin connector, an adapter may be
included. See “Four-Wire Harness Adapter” later in this
section.
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Light Blue: Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
• Red: Battery Feed
• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
4-85
Instrument Panel Jumper Wiring Harness
Notice: If your vehicle has factory or
dealer-installed HUMMER off-road lamps, the place
where an electric trailer brake connection must
be made is already in use. Do not attempt to
double-up or “piggyback” the connection, because
this could cause a failure or damage to your
vehicle, the electric trailer brake system, or both. If
you want to connect a trailer with electric brakes
to your vehicle, see your dealer to disconnect
the off-road lamps. Also, read Add-On Electrical
Equipment on page 5-101 for more information.
This harness may be included with your vehicle as part
of the heavy-duty trailer wiring package.
{CAUTION:
Be sure to use only the correct trailer brake
harness, the one intended for use on your
vehicle. If you use some other trailer brake
harness, even if it seems to fit, your trailer
brakes may not work at all. You could have a
crash in which you or others could be injured.
Use only the trailer brake harness intended for
your vehicle. If it is no longer available to you,
be sure to get a proper replacement from your
dealer.
This harness is for an electric brake controller and
includes a trailer battery feed fuse. It should be installed
by your dealer or a qualified service center.
4-86
Four-Wire Harness Adapter
This adapter may be
included with your vehicle
as part of the heavy-duty
trailer wiring package.
Use this adapter to connect a standard four-way round
pin connector to the seven-wire harness on your
vehicle.
Connect the adapter with the tab pointing up. The flip
cap on the vehicle’s seven-wire harness will lock
onto the tab (see arrow in the previous graphic) and
help hold the adapter in place. Plug the four-way round
pin connector onto the adapter.
4-87
✍ NOTES
4-88
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ......................................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-10
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-14
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-21
Engine Coolant .............................................5-24
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-27
Engine Overheating .......................................5-27
Cooling System ............................................5-30
Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-35
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-36
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-37
Brakes ........................................................5-38
Battery ........................................................5-42
Jump Starting ...............................................5-43
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-48
Rear Axle .......................................................5-50
Front Axle ......................................................5-51
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-52
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-52
Headlamps ..................................................5-52
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ..............5-53
Sidemarker Lamps ........................................5-54
Daytime Running Lamps ................................5-54
Roof Marker Lamps ......................................5-55
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-57
Taillamps .....................................................5-57
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-58
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-59
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tires ..............................................................5-60
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-68
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-69
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-70
Buying New Tires .........................................5-71
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-72
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-73
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-74
Tire Chains ..................................................5-75
Accessory Inflator .........................................5-76
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-78
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-79
Spare Tire ...................................................5-92
Appearance Care ............................................5-92
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-93
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-95
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-95
5-2
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-95
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-98
Finish Damage .............................................5-99
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-99
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-99
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-100
Vehicle Identification .....................................5-101
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-101
Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-101
Electrical System ..........................................5-101
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-101
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-102
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-102
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-102
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-111
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-11.
Your vehicle may have an air bag system. If it does,
see Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 1-72 before attempting to do your own
service work.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-16.
5-4
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of
Automobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-101.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87
or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use
a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. A
little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is
considered normal. This does not indicate a problem
exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary. If you are
using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and hear heavy
knocking, your engine needs service.
Canada Only
5-5
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-38 )
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. You should not have to add anything to your
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. General
Motors recommends that you buy gasolines that
are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
5-6
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due
to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of
gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not
recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing
MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the
performance of the emission control system may be
affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If
this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
5-7
The fuel cap is located on
the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
Some vehicles may be equipped with a locking fuel cap.
Use the fuel cap key to unlock the fuel cap. If you
ever need a replacement key, your dealer can help you
get one.
Turn the fuel cap slowly to
the left (counterclockwise)
to remove it. While
refueling, let the fuel cap
hang by the tether, if it
has one.
Some vehicles may be
equipped with a fuel door.
Open the door to access
the fuel cap.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
5-8
Be careful not to spill fuel. Don’t top off or overfill your
tank and wait a few seconds after you’ve finished
pumping before you remove the nozzle. Clean any
spilled fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible.
See Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on
page 5-95.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. this would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-38.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-38.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-9
Checking Things Under
the Hood
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
1. Release both hood side latches.
5-10
2. Pull the handle located
inside the vehicle to
the lower left of
the steering wheel.
3. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull the
assist handles toward you to lift the hood.
4. Pull the hood open until it is supported by the
cables.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. To close the hood, do the following:
1. Hold up the hood a few inches from the closed
position and then let it go so that it has enough
force to engage the hood latch.
2. Pull up on the assist handles to be sure that the
hood is latched.
3. Latch both hood side latches.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the VORTEC™ 6000 V8 engine you will see the following:
5-12
A. Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System on
page 5-30 and Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
on page 5-27.
B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-37.
D. Engine Oil Fill. See Engine Oil on page 5-14.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-14.
F. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-21.
G. Fan. See Cooling System on page 5-30 and Engine
Fan Noise on page 5-35.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND). See Jump
Starting on page 5-43.
I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View). See
Power Steering Fluid on page 5-36.
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-43.
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes on page 5-38.
L. Underhood Fuse Block. See “Underhood Fuse Block”
under Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-102.
M. Battery. See Battery on page 5-42.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. Pull down the hood and close it firmly.
5-13
Engine Oil
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on the
instrument cluster, it means you need to check
your engine oil level right away.
For more information, see “CHECK OIL LEVEL” under
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
5-14
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil
dipstick might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, then you will need to add at least one
quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil
crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-111.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, your engine could be damaged.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
5-15
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle. However, if it is going to be 0°F
(–18°C) or above and SAE 5W-30 is not available,
you may use SAE 10W-30.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-16
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System)
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will come on. Change
your oil as soon as possible within the next two times you
stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are driving under the
best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that
an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, your
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer
has GM-trained service people who will perform this work
using genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-17
How to Reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
Message
The GM Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on, reset
the system.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message, see “GM
Oil Life System” under DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-44 for vehicles equipped with the DIC, or do
the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly
three times within five seconds.
If the OIL LIFE RESET message flashes for
10 seconds, the system is resetting.
3. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure. If it still does
not reset, see your dealer for service.
5-18
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a
service station or a local recycling center for help.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
When to Inspect
Notice: If you spray water into the engine air
cleaner/filter intake and water enters the engine air
cleaner/filter housing, as shown in the illustration,
you could damage your vehicle’s engine. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
spray water into the engine air cleaner/filter intake
and/or housing.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter every 15,000 miles
(25 000 km) and replace every 100,000 miles
(161 000 km). If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change and
replace it earlier as required.
The engine air cleaner/filter assembly is located in the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove it from the
vehicle and lightly shake the it to release loose dust and
dirt. If the air cleaner/filter remains caked with dirt, a
new one is required.
How to Inspect
5-19
To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Loosen the screws on the cover.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to replace the engine air cleaner/filter. See Owner
Checks and Services on page 6-9.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps to
stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful
working on the engine with the air cleaner/
filter off.
2. Lift the cover upward and set it aside.
3. Pull the air cleaner/filter up and out from the air
cleaner housing. Care should be taken to dislodge
as little dirt as possible.
4. Clean the air cleaner/filter sealing surface and the
housing.
5. Reinstall the new air cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
5-20
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check
When to Check and Change
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic – especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
5-21
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle
in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), you
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
• Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these
steps:
The transmission dipstick
handle with the graphic is
located at the rear of
the engine compartment,
on the passenger’s side.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
5-22
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while it
is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.) If the
fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to
bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It
doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one pint
(0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT area or cross-hatched area for a hot
check. Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to
get an accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON® -III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON® -III is
not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under How to Check.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-23
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-27.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
5-24
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
5-25
Checking Coolant
The coolant surge tank is
located in the engine
compartment on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
If your vehicle is equipped with the LOW COOLANT
LEVEL message and it comes on and stays on, it means
you’re low on engine coolant.
See “Low Coolant Level” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-56.
5-26
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-35. In addition, you will
find an ENGINE COOLANT HOT, ENGINE
OVERHEATED and a REDUCED ENGINE POWER
message in the DIC on the instrument panel. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-56.
5-27
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed, an
overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In
this mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine
performance. This operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 5-14.
5-28
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” under Engine Overheating on page 5-27
for information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” under Engine
Overheating on page 5-27 for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant condition,
can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat, but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-75.
5-29
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
2. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving – DRIVE (D).
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast
as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the
engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” listed previously in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-30
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
The coolant level should
be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it isn’t,
you may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the
radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
in the Index for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
5-31
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level isn’t at or above the FULL
COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
surge tank, but be sure the cooling system, including
the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you
do it. See Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for more
information.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can
CAUTION:
5-32
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
comeout at high speed. Never turn the cap
when the cooling system, including the
radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
cooling system and radiator pressure cap to
cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will.
Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set
for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, your engine could
get too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. Your engine could catch fire and you
or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Locate the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap that has this label.
You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
capwhen the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, are no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap
slowly counterclockwise (left) about one full turn. If
you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
5-33
3. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-34
4. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to the FULL COLD mark.
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine.
5. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches FULL COLD mark.
In most everyday driving conditions, the fan is spinning
slower and the clutch is not fully engaged. This
improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under
heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high outside
temperatures, the fan speed increases as the clutch
more fully engages. So you may hear an increase in fan
noise. This is normal and should not be mistaken as
the transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It
is merely the cooling system functioning properly. The
fan will slow down when additional cooling is not
required and the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially
disengages.
6. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
5-35
Power Steering Fluid
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
Locate the cap with this
symbol. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more
information on location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for reservoir location.
5-36
Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then
remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the
dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
What to Use
Adding Washer Fluid
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Your vehicle has a low washer fluid message that
comes on when the washer fluid is low. The message is
displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition
cycle if the fluid is low. When the LOW WASHER FLUID
message is displayed, you will need to add washer
fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
The windshield washer
fluid reservoir is located in
the engine compartment
on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-37
Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer
fluid until the tank is full.
Brakes
Notice:
Brake Fluid
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
reservoir.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-38
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it
is not, have your brake
system checked to
see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
5-39
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake
fluid.
5-40
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
Care on page 5-92.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly).
{CAUTION:
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
5-41
Brake Pedal Travel
Battery
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco® battery. When it is time for a new battery, get
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
5-42
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or
more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from the
battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-43 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3-88.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Jump Starting
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. But please use the following steps to do it
safely.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
5-43
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory power outlets. Turn off the radio
and all lamps that aren’t needed. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries. And it could
save your radio!
5-44
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations of the other vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal and a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal. You should always use these
remote terminals instead of the terminals on the
battery.
The remote positive (+)
terminal is located near the
engine accessory drive
bracket. On some vehicles,
the terminal may be
covered under under a red
plastic cover. To access
the remote positive (+)
terminal, open the
red plastic cover.
The remote negative (−)
terminal is located on
the engine accessory
drive bracket and is
marked GND.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the ACDelco® battery
installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right amount of
fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care
of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-45
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive terminal (+) if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal, if the vehicle has one.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you’ll
get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5-46
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of
the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to
the negative (−)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has
one. Your vehicle’s
remote negative (−)
terminal is
marked GND.
9. Connect the other end
of the negative (−)
cable at least 18 inches
(45 cm) away from
the dead battery, but
not near engine
parts that move.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
The electrical connection is just as good there, and
the chance of sparks getting back to the battery
is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for awhile.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-47
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) remote terminal cover to its
original position.
All-Wheel Drive
Transfer Case
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal.
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Negative (−) Terminals.
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
5-48
It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to change the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
1. Remove the filler plug (A). The fluid level should be
just below the bottom of the filler plug hole. To get
an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
2. Add fluid if necessary.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
3. Reinstall the filler plug. Use care not to overtighten
the filler plug.
A. Filler Plug
B. Drain Plug
5-49
Rear Axle
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
When to Check Lubricant
When the differential is cold, the proper level is from
5/8 inch to 1 5/8 inch (15 mm to 40 mm) below the
bottom of the filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid to
reach the proper level.
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
5-50
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Front Axle
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
When to Check and Change Lubricant
When the differential is cold, the proper level is from
about 1/4 inch (6 mm) to about 3/8 inch (10 mm) below
the filler plug hole.
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-51
Bulb Replacement
See Replacement Bulbs on page 5-58 for the proper
type of bulbs to use.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps
1. Open the hood as described earlier under Hood
Release on page 5-10 and locate the affected
headlamp on the inner front portion of the hood.
5-52
2. Turn the bulb/socket
retainer (arrow)
counterclockwise to
unlock the bulb/socket.
You may prefer to
unplug the electrical
connector before
removing the bulb/
socket. If so, complete
Step 4 before doing
this step.
3. Pull the bulb/socket
straight out from the
headlamp housing.
4. Unplug the electrical
connector.
Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamps
1. Open the hood as described earlier under Hood
Release on page 5-10 and locate the affected lamp.
2. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and
remove it from the lamp
housing.
5. Push the new bulb/socket into the headlamp
assembly making sure to align the splines on
the bulb/socket with the splines in the headlamp
housing. Use care not to touch the bulb with
your fingers or hands.
6. Turn the bulb/socket retainer clockwise to lock the
bulb/socket in place.
3. Pull the bulb from the bulb socket.
7. Plug in the electrical connector.
4. Put the new bulb into the bulb socket.
5. Put the bulb socket into the lamp housing and turn
it clockwise until it locks.
5-53
Sidemarker Lamps
It is recommended that these components be replaced
by your dealer.
2. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and
remove it from the lamp
housing.
Daytime Running Lamps
1. Locate the lamp
assembly behind the
front bumper. It is
easiest to come in from
the side of the
vehicle through the
wheel opening.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket.
4. Put the new bulb into the bulb socket.
5. Put the bulb socket into the lamp housing and turn
it clockwise until it locks.
5-54
Roof Marker Lamps
Corner Roof Marker Lamps
2. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it and
remove the old bulb.
3. Put a new bulb into the socket.
1. Remove the screw and lift off the lens.
4. Reinstall the socket into the lens and turn it
clockwise to lock it into place.
5. Hook the side of the lens with the hook end in the
notch first and then tighten the screw.
5-55
Center Roof Marker Lamps
1. Push in on the notch with a flat tool and pull the
lamp out.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove
it from the lamp housing.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket.
4. Put the new bulb into the bulb socket.
5. Place the hook end of the lamp in place on one
side and push the other end of the lamp down
until it locks in place.
5-56
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
If your vehicle has this component and it needs
replacement, it is recommended that it be replaced as a
unit by your dealer.
2. Remove the two
screws from the rear
lamp assembly
and remove the rear
lamp assembly.
Taillamps
A. Stoplamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
C. Back-Up Lamp
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp housing.
1. Open the liftgate.
5-57
4. Pull the bulb straight
out from the socket.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Low-Beam and High-Beam
Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamps
Rear Taillamp and Stoplamp
Rear Turn Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Roof Marker Lamps
5. Press a new bulb into the socket, insert it into the
taillamp housing and turn the socket
counterclockwise until it is locked in place.
6. Reinstall the rear lamp assembly and tighten the
screws.
5-58
Bulb Number
9007
4114K
4157K or 3157KX
3157
3157
4157 or 3157
168
For replacement bulbs not listed here, please consult
your dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear and cracking. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-14.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do the
following:
1. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it is
facing away from the windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-59
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
CAUTION:
5-60
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
•
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a
typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
(A) Tire Size Code: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size Code” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s
specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) Department of Transportation (DOT): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may have the date of
manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
P-Metric Tire
5-61
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information, see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-72.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-68 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-67.
LT-Metric Tire
5-62
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s
specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that can
be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used in a dual configuration. For
information on recommended tire pressure see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-68 and Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-67.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may have the date of
manufacture.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed
to support that load when used as a single. For
information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation
- Tire Pressure on page 5-68 and Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-67.
(D) Department of Transportation (DOT): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
5-63
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of a
tire size.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the
tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is “75,” as shown in item “C” of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall
is 75% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
“R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D” means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter “P” as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
5-64
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire. The
load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from “A” to “Z”.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
“R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D” means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter “LT” as
the first two characters in the tire size means a light
truck tire engineered to standards set by the U. S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is “75,” as shown in item “C” of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
75% as high as it is wide.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire. The
load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from “A” to “Z”. The light truck tire size example
above shows dual or single tire configurations.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
5-65
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to its
width.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-67.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-67.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-68.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can
also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
5-66
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-67.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
There are 6.9 kPa’s to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds
(68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-67.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that faces outward
when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand and or model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-68 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-67.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. See When It
Is Time for New Tires on page 5-70.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tire
information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-72.
5-67
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-67.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation pressure. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-67.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
The Certification/Tire label or Tire and Loading
Information label shows the correct inflation pressures
for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-67.
5-68
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you
can get the following:
•
•
•
•
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
When to Check
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Check your tires once a month or more.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure is low,
add air until you reach the recommended amount.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-70 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-74 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4, for scheduled rotation intervals.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal
stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the tire
pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
5-69
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Certification/Tire label or Tire and Loading Information
label. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-67.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-111.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a Flat
Tire” in the Index.
5-70
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining. Some
commercial truck tires may
not have treadwear
indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
ride and other things during normal service on your
vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design, the
TPC number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud
and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certification/Tire label or the Tire and Loading
Information label. For examples of these labels and their
location on your vehicle, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-67.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires) the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a
Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
General Motors recommends that you get tires with that
same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are designed to give proper
endurance, handling, speed rating, load range, traction,
5-71
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
5-72
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
5-73
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-79 for more
information.
5-74
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class ″S″ type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them
on the rear axle tires and tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive
slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too
fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.
5-75
Accessory Inflator
Your vehicle may be equipped with an accessory inflator
system. You can inflate things like basketballs and
bicycle tires. Also, you can use it to bring your tire
pressure up to the proper pressure. The engine must be
running and the gearshift lever must be in PARK (P) for
the inflator to operate.
The accessory inflator kit
is located in the spare tire
cover pocket. The kit
includes a hose and three
nozzle adapters.
The accessory inflator is
located in the rear
compartment on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle.
To use the accessory inflator, attach the appropriate
nozzle adapter to the end of the hose if required. Then
attach that end of the hose to the object you wish to
inflate. Remove the dust cover and attach the hose to
the outlet.
5-76
The accessory inflator hose also has a built-in air
pressure gage. As soon as you start to inflate an object
it will automatically read the current pressure.
Press and release the switch to turn the accessory
inflator on. The indicator light will remain on while the
inflator is running. Press and release the switch to
turn the inflator off. Place the inflator kit tools and the
hose in the pouch and store it back in the spare
tire cover pocket.
If your vehicle is equipped with the air suspension
system, load leveling will not function with the inflator
hose attached to the inflator outlet.
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate any object only to its recommended
pressure.
5-77
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
5-78
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
5. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on
the other side, at the opposite end of the
vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5-79
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
Open the tool bag and you will find the following tools
which you will use to remove the spare tire and flat tire:
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you’ll need is behind and to the side of
the driver’s side second row seat. To remove the
equipment, do the following:
1. Fold the driver’s side second row seat down. See
60/40 Split Bench Seat on page 1-8.
2. Turn the wingnut (A),
which holds the jack,
counterclockwise
to release the jack.
3. Turn the wingnut (B), which holds the jack tool kit,
counterclockwise to release it.
5-80
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Jack Handle Extension (Used for Rear Flats Only)
Jack Handle
Wheel Wrench
Ratchet
Spanner Wrench
Locking Pin (If Equipped) Not used for tire changing
procedure. See “Power Winch Platform” under If You
Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-56.
The spare tire and wheel blocks are stored in the rear
cargo area. Remove the tire cover to get to them.
Follow the instructions to remove the wheel blocks and
spare tire:
1. Remove the wheel blocks from the tire retainer
plate by turning the wingnut counterclockwise.
A. Spare or Flat Tire
B. Receiver Extension (If Equipped) Not used for tire
changing procedure. See “Receiver Extension” under
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-56.
C. Tire Retainer Plate
D. Nut
E. Wheel Blocks
2. Place the flat end of the wheel wrench through the
hole in the spanner wrench.
5-81
3. Place the end of the
spanner wrench on the
nut and then turn
the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to
loosen the nut holding
the tire to the
carrier.
4. Pull off the tire retainer plate and set it aside.
Remove the spare tire from the wheel carrier.
5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
Use the art and text following to finish changing a
flat tire.
5-82
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), the wheel
blocks (B), the wheel wrench (C), jack handle
extension (D), the jack handle (E) and the ratchet (F).
Before proceeding, be sure to set the wheel
blocks (B) on the appropriate tire as shown previously.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
1. To remove the center
cap, place the flat end
of the wheel wrench
in the slot on the wheel
and gently pry the
center cap out.
2. Slide the ratchet onto the wheel wrench with the
DOWN mark facing you.
3. Turn the ratchet counterclockwise to loosen the
wheel nuts. Don’t remove them yet.
You will now need to jack the vehicle up using the
instructions following.
4. Assemble the jack and tools as follows:
Front Flat Tire: Attach the jack handle (E) with the
hook end connected to the u-hook/clevis on the
jack (A). Slide the ratchet (F) onto the jack handle (E)
with the UP mark facing you.
5-83
Front Flat Tire: Position
the jack under the vehicle
on the frame behind
the flat tire where the
frame sections overlap.
See the graphic following
for an approximate
measurement of the jack
location on the frame.
Rear Flat Tire: Attach the jack handle extension (D)
to the jack handle (E) and then press the clip (arrow)
so it engages. Then attach the jack handle (E) with
the hook end connected to the u-hook/clevis on the
jack (A). Slide the ratchet (F) onto the jack handle
extension (D) with the UP mark facing you.
5. Turn the ratchet (F) clockwise to raise the jack
head to the lifting point.
5-84
Front Position
Rear Flat Tire: Place the
jack under the curved rear
axle pad. Make sure
the jack head is positioned
so that the rear axle
pad is resting securely on
the jack head.
Rear Position
X= 28.5 inches (72.0 cm)
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
5-85
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
6. Turn the ratchet clockwise to raise the vehicle.
Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so
there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the
ground.
5-86
7. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
5-87
9. After mounting the
spare, put the wheel
nuts back on with
the rounded end of the
nuts toward the
wheel.
Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the
ratchet/wheel wrench to tighten the nuts, with the
UP mark facing you, clockwise until the wheel
is held against the hub. You will not be tightening
the nuts fully yet.
5-88
Front Position
Rear Position
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the ratchet
counterclockwise, with the DOWN mark facing you.
Lower the jack completely.
11. Tighten the nuts firmly
in a crisscross
sequence as shown by
turning the ratchet
clockwise, with the UP
mark facing you.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.
If you have to replace them, be sure to get new
GM original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See “Capacities
and Specifications” in the Index for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
specification. See “Capacities and Specifications” in
the index for the wheel nut torque specification.
12. When you install the wheel and tire, you must also
reinstall the center cap. Place the cap on the wheel
and tap it into place until it sits flush with the wheel.
5-89
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
1. Slide the flat or spare tire (A) onto the tire carrier.
Use the art and text following to help you store the flat or
spare tire and tools back in their proper spot when
you are done.
2. Slide the tire retainer plate (C) into the wheel
opening. Be sure that the stud attached to the
tire carrier passes through the hole in the tire
retainer plate.
Store the flat or spare tire back inside the vehicle on the
spare tire mount.
A. Spare or Flat Tire
B. Receiver Extension
(If Equipped)
5-90
C. Tire Retainer Plate
D. Nut
E. Wheel Blocks
3. Tighten the nut (D) by hand until the tire retainer
plate (C) is snug against the wheel.
Then use the ratchet and
spanner to tighten the nut
firmly. Try to move the
tire back and forth slightly
to be sure it is secure.
4. Reattach the wheel blocks (E) to the tire retainer
plate (C) and tighten the wing nut.
5. Reinstall the tire cover onto the spare or flat tire.
Follow these instructions to store the jack and tools:
1. Lower the jack completely.
2. Place the jack in the mounting bracket.
3. Tighten the wingnut (A)
until the jack is
securely fastened.
4. Place the tools in the bag.
5. Slide the securing clip over the bag and secure the
bag to the floor by tightening the wingnut (B) to the
stud coming out of the floor.
In order to reduce the potential of the jack
squeaking or rattling, you will need to preload the
jack so it fits tightly in the mounting bracket.
To do this, turn the u-hook/clevis at the top of the
jack clockwise until the jack is held tight in the
mounting bracket.
5-91
Spare Tire
Appearance Care
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-68 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-67
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-79.
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed
space. When you use anything from a container to clean
your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows when you are cleaning the inside.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire
will be available in case you need it again.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than
the road tires— those originally installed on your vehicle.
This spare tires was developed for use on your
vehicle, so it’s all right to drive on it.
If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match your
vehicle’s original road tires and wheels in size and
type, do not include the spare in the tire rotation.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
5-92
Do not use any of these unless this manual says you
can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and
carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very well.
You and get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 5-100.
Here are some cleaning tips:
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can — before
they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
may have to do this more than once.
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
5-93
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument
Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use on a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or
sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the surface
finish.
Cleaning Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
5-94
Cleaning the Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker won’t be damaged. Clean spots with just water
and mild soap.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-100.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle
well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-100.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
5-95
The overall height, width, and underbody clearances of
the HUMMER H2 are similar to current General Motors’
full-size light duty trucks. This means a HUMMER H2
should fit in a standard car wash. But, if your vehicle has
added accessories like roof-mounted lamps, roof basket,
etc., it might not fit properly in a standard car wash.
Notice: Certain add-on accessories can change the
dimensions of your vehicle. If you’ve added items
to the outside of your vehicle, it might not fit
properly in a standard car wash. Your vehicle and
the car wash could be damaged. To help prevent
damage, know how accessories have changed the
dimensions of your vehicle and check with the
car wash manager before entering a car wash.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that does not have enough
clearance for any roof-mounted accessories (such as
off-road lamps or a roof basket) on your vehicle, you
can damage your vehicle. To avoid damaging your
vehicle in a car wash, remove any roof-mounted
accessories if you can, and do not use an automatic
car wash while roof-mounted accessories are on
your vehicle. See Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle on page 5-95 for more information.
Also, see Luggage Carrier on page 2-46 and “Off-Road
Lamps” under Exterior Lamps on page 3-13.
5-96
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-100.
If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Cleaning the Windshield, Backglass
and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
5-97
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Wheels
Cleaning Tires
Your vehicle will have either aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff
off immediately after application.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
5-98
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Chemical Paint Spotting
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas of
finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s
body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
5-99
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
5-100
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and convertible
tops.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
Swirl Remover Polish
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
Cleaner Wax
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines and
Foaming Tire Shine Low
protects in one easy step,
Gloss
no wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
Wash Wax Concentrate
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
Spot Lifter
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
Odor Eliminator
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12.
Vehicle Identification
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
You’ll find this label located in the glove box. It’s very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
•
•
•
•
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-72.
5-101
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
5-102
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse block access
door is located on the
driver’s side edge of the
instrument panel. Pull
off the cover to access the
fuse block.
To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold
the end of the fuse between your thumb and index
finger and pull straight out.
You may have spare fuses located behind the fuse
block access door. These can be used to replace a bad
fuse. However, make sure it is of the correct amperage.
Fuses
RR Wiper
SEO ACCY
WS WPR
TBC ACCY
IGN 3
4WD
Usage
Rear Window Wiper Switch
Special Equipment Option
Accessory
Windshield Wipers
Truck Body Controller
Accessory
Rear Heated Seats Module
Four-Wheel Drive Switch, Air
Suspension Switch/Module
5-103
Fuses
HTR A/C
LOCK
HVAC 1
L DOOR
CRUISE
UNLOCK
RR FOG LP
BRAKE
DRIVER UNLOCK
IGN 0
TBC IGN 0
VEH CHMSL
LT TRLR ST/TRN
LT TRN
5-104
Usage
Not Used
Power Door Lock Relay
(Lock Function)
Inside Rearview Mirror,
Climate Control System
Driver’s Door Harness
Connection
Cruise Control
Power Door Lock Relay
(Unlock Function)
Not Used
Brake Switch
Power Door Lock Relay
(Driver’s Door Unlock
Function)
Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock, Powertrain Control
Module, Transmission
Truck Body Controller
Vehicle and Trailer High
Mounted Stoplamp
Left Turn Signal/Stop Trailer
Left Turn Signals and
Sidemarkers
Fuses
VEH STOP
RT TRLR ST/TRN
RT TRN
BODY
DDM
AUX PWR 2
LOCKS
ECC
TBC 2C
FLASH
CB LT DOORS
TBC 2B
TBC 2A
Usage
Vehicle Stoplamps, Brake
Module, Electronic Throttle
Control Module
Right Turn Signal/Stop Trailer
Right Turn Signals and
Sidemarkers
Harness Connector
Driver Door Module
Instrument Panel Outlets,
Rear Cargo Area Power
Outlets
Rear Doors and Liftgate
Power Lock Relay Feed
Liftgate
Truck Body Controller
Flasher Module
Left Rear Power Window
Circuit Breaker and Driver
Door Module
Truck Body Controller
Truck Body Controller
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Device
The center instrument panel utility block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
SEO
TRAILER
UPFIT
SL RIDE
HDLR 2
BODY
DEFOG
HDLNR 1
SPARE RELAY
CB SEAT
CB RT DOOR
SPARE
INFO
Usage
Special Equipment
Option/Off-road Lamps
Harness Connector
Trailer Brake Wiring
Upfitter (Not Used)
Ride Control (Not Used)
Headliner Wiring Connector 2
Body Wiring Connector
Rear Defogger Relay
Headliner Wiring Connector 1
Not Used
Driver and Passenger Seat
Module Circuit Breaker
Rear Right Power Window,
Passenger Door Module
Not Used
Not Used
5-105
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block in the engine compartment is
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle near the
battery. Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor,
hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index
finger and pull straight out.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on its location.
5-106
5-107
Fuses
GLOW PLUG
CUST FEED
STUD #1
MBEC 1
BLOWER
LBEC 2
STUD #2
ABS
VSES/ECAS
IGN A
IGN B
5-108
Usage
Not Used
Gasoline Accessory Power
Accessory Power/Trailer
Wiring
Mid Bussed Electrical Center
Power Feed, Front Seats,
Right Doors
Front Climate Control Fan
Left Bussed Electrical Center,
Door Modules, Door Locks,
Auxiliary Power Outlet—Rear
Cargo Area and Instrument
Panel
Accessory Power/Trailer
Wiring Brake Feed
Anti-Lock Brakes
Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension
Ignition Switch
Ignition Switch
Fuses
LBEC 1
TRL PARK
RR PARK
LR PARK
PARK LP
STARTER
INTPARK
STOP LP
TBC BATT
SUNROOF
SEO B2
4WS
RR HVAC
AUX PWR
Usage
Left Bussed Electrical Center,
Left Doors, Truck Body
Controller, Flasher Module
Parking Lamps Trailer Wiring
Right Rear Parking and
Sidemarker Lamps
Left Rear Parking and
Sidemarker Lamps
Parking Lamps Relay
Starter Relay
Roof Marker Lamps
Stoplamps
Truck Body Controller Battery
Feed
Sunroof
Off-Road Lamps
Vent Solenoid Canister
Not Used
Auxiliary Power Outlet —
Console
Fuses
IGN 1
PCM 1
ETC/ECM
INJ 1
INJ 2
IGN E
RTD
TRL B/U
PCM B
F/PMP
02A
B/U LP
Usage
PCM Ignition
Powertrain Control Module
Electronic Throttle Control,
Electronic Brake Controller
Ignition Coil, Fuel
Injectors-Bank 1
Ignition Coil, Fuel
Injectors-Bank 2
Instrument Panel Cluster, Air
Conditioning Relay, Turn
Signal/Hazard Switch, Starter
Relay, Electronic Brake
Controller TC2 Mode Switch
Electronic Brake Controller
Battery Feed
Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring
Powertrain Control Module,
Fuel Pump
Fuel Pump (Relay)
Oxygen Sensors
Back-up Lamps, Automatic
Transmission Shift Lock
Control System
Fuses
RR DEFOG
HDLP-HI
PRIME
O2B
SIR
FRT PARK
DRL
SEO IGN
TBC IGN1
HI HDLP-LT
LH HID
DRL
IPC/DIC
HVAC/ECAS
CIG LTR
Usage
Rear Window Defogger
Headlamp High Beam Relay
Not Used
Oxygen Sensors
Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint System
Front Parking Lamps,
Sidemarker Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps
(Relay)
Rear Defog Relay
Truck Body Controller Ignition
High Beam Headlamp-Left
Not Used
Daytime Running Lamps
Instrument Panel
Cluster/Driver Information
Center
Climate Control
Controller/Electronically
Controlled Air Suspension
Cigarette Lighter
5-109
Fuses
HI HDLP-RT
HDLP-LOW
A/C COMP
A/C COMP
RR WPR
RADIO
SEO B1
LO HDLP-LT
BTSI
CRANK
LO HDLP-RT
5-110
Usage
High Beam Headlamp-Right
Headlamp Low Beam Relay
Air Conditioning Compressor
Relay
Air Conditioning Compressor
Rear Wiper/Washer
Audio System
Mid Bussed Electrical Center,
HomeLink, Rear Heated
Seats
Headlamp Low Beam-Left
Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System
Starting System
Headlamp Low Beam-Right
Fuses
FOG LP
FOG LP
HORN
W/S WASH
W/S WASH
INFO
RADIO AMP
RH HID
HORN
EAP
TREC
SBA
Usage
Not Used
Not Used
Horn Relay
Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump Relay
Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump
OnStar
Radio Amplifier
Not Used
Horn
Not Used
All-Wheel Drive Module
Not Used
Capacities and Specifications
Please refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information. All capacities are
approximate.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Spark Plug Gap
VORTEC™ 6000 V8
U
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Cooling System
English
Metric
13.0 quarts
12.7 L
After refill, the level must be rechecked. See Cooling System on page 5-30.
Engine Oil with Filter
6.0 quarts
5.7 L
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine oil so that the fluid is within the proper operating
range. See Engine Oil on page 5-14.
Fuel Tank
32.0 gallons
121.0 L
1.6 lbs.
0.7 kg
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R-134a
Wheels and Tires
Application
Description
Torque
Wheel Nuts
8 bolts (14 mm)
140 lb ft (190 Y)
Tire Pressure
See the Certification/Tire label on the rear edge of the driver’s door.
5-111
✍ NOTES
5-112
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-3
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-8
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
At Least Once a Month .................................6-10
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-14
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-15
Maintenance Record .....................................6-16
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See Off-Road Driving on page 4-17.
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-67.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-8 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
6-3
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your GM
Goodwrench dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to get service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-14. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
6-4
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL light in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It
is possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate that
vehicle service is necessary for over a year. However,
your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a
year and at this time the system must be reset. Your GM
Goodwrench dealer has GM-trained service technicians
who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and
reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil on page 5-14 for information on the Engine
Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL light appears, certain
services, checks and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL light comes on within ten months since
vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light comes on ten months
or more since the last service or if the light has not
come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 5-14. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19. An Emission Control Service. See footnote †.
•
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-60.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
6-5
Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
•
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or
leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
6-6
•
•
•
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
Change transfer case fluid. See
footnote (g).
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
•
•
•
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19.
An Emission Control Service.
•
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
•
•
Engine cooling system service (or
every 5 years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An
Emission Control Service.
•
6-7
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, transmission shift linkage and parking
brake cable guides. Ball joints should not be lubricated
unless their temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher,
or they could be damaged.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts,
signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant
velocity joints, rubber boots and axle seals for leaks.
6-8
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken air bag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air
bag system does not need regular maintenance.)
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
rear compartment hinges, outer liftgate handle pivot
points, rear door detent link, roller mechanism, liftgate
handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, cargo
door hinge, locks and folding seat hardware. More
frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a
corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better and not stick or squeak.
(g) Add fluid as needed. (A fluid loss could indicate a
problem; repair as needed.) Check vent hose at transfer
case for kinks and proper installation.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-24 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-14 for further
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
6-9
Engine Coolant Level Check
At Least Once a Year
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-24 for further details.
Starter Switch Check
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-60 for further
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. Push, pull and then try to rotate or turn
the spare tire. If it moves, tighten it. See Changing a
Flat Tire on page 5-79.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-29 if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench dealer for service.
6-10
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-29 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but do not start the engine. Without
applying the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift
lever moves out of PARK (P), contact your GM
Goodwrench dealer for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The key should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
6-11
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-12
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your GM
Goodwrench dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
Engine Oil
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5-14.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
and use only
Engine Coolant water
DEX-COOL® Coolant. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-24.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen Washer Solvent.
Power Steering Fluid (GM Part
Power Steering GM
No.
U.S.
89021184, in Canada
System
89021186).
Usage
Automatic
Transmission
Fluid/Lubricant
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada
Chassis
88901242) or lubricant meeting
Lubrication
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Front and Rear Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
12378261, in Canada 10953455)
Axle
meeting GM Specification 9986115.
®
-III Automatic
Transfer Case DEXRON
Transmission Fluid.
Usage
Front Axle
Propshaft
Spline
Hood Hinges
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Fluid/Lubricant
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in
Canada 10953511) or lubricant
meeting requirements of GM
9985830.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada
992887).
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (GM Part No. U.S.
12371287, in Canada 10953437).
6-13
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
Engine Oil Filter
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Filter
Windsheield Wiper Blades
17.0 inches (43.0 cm)
Rear Wiper Blades 11.0 inches (28.0 cm)
6-14
ACDelco® Part No.
PF44
—
41–985
GF626
GM Part No.
25010633
88944151
12571164
25121792
—
15706394
—
15174476
Engine Drive Belt Routing
(A) Air Conditioning Compressor
6-15
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages.
Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ........................................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ..................................................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-5
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Records .....................................................7-9
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ..............................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-10
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to HUMMER. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the HUMMER Consumer Relations Manager by
calling 1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376), Customer
Assistance prompt. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by
calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French).
7-2
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)
When contacting HUMMER, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800- 955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. You can find your specific vehicle information
all in one place.
The Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual. (United States only)
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members. (United States only)
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
HUMMER has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with HUMMER by dialing: 1-800-833-6537. (TTY users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Canada – Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance Offices
HUMMER encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes
to write to HUMMER, the letter should be addressed to
HUMMER’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States – Customer Assistance
HUMMER Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33171
Detroit, MI 48232-5177
1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376)
1-800-833-6537 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-4
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas – Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) –
Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to
$1,000 toward eligible
aftermarket driver or
passenger adaptive
equipment you may require
for your vehicle (hand
controls, wheelchair/
scooter lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The offer is available for
a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. For more details, or to determine your
vehicle’s eligibility, see your GM dealer or call the
GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
Security While You Travel
1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376)
As the proud owner of a new HUMMER vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the HUMMER Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. HUMMER’s
Roadside Assistance toll-free number is staffed by
courteous and capable Roadside Assistance
Representatives who are available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles.
7-5
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance when the
vehicle is mired in sand, mud or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. (The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.)
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
• Trip Routing: Your Roadside Assistance
Representative can provide you with specific
information regarding this feature.
• Trip Interruption Expense Benefits: Your
Roadside Assistance Representative can provide
you with specific information regarding this feature.
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under HUMMER’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.
However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
7-6
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number and delivery
date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone call
away. HUMMER Roadside Assistance:
1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376), text telephone (TTY)
users, call 1-888-889-2438.
HUMMER reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in
HUMMER’s judgement, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HUMMER reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy Transportation
HUMMER has always exemplified quality and value in
its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required.
This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty
repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, HUMMER
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way or round trip shuttle ride to a destination up to
10 miles from the dealership.
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
7-7
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement (five days maximum) may be available
for the use of public transportation such as taxi or
bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses (five day maximum) may be
available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and
be supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
you obtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.
Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of $40 a
day and must be supported by receipts. This requires
that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet
state, local and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You
are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also
be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive
mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of
the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
7-8
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Records
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components to
optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for air bag
deployment and, if so equipped, to provide anti-lock
braking and to help the driver control the vehicle
in difficult driving situations. Some information may be
stored during regular operations to facilitate repair
of detected malfunctions; other information is stored only
in a crash or near crash event by computer systems
commonly called event data recorders (EDR).
In a crash or near crash event, computer systems, such
as the Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
in your vehicle may record information about the
condition of the vehicle and how it was operated, such
as engine speed, brake applications, throttle position,
vehicle speed, safety belt usage, air bag readiness, air
bag performance data, and the severity of a collision.
This information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the SDM is required.
GM will not access information about a crash event or
share it with others other than
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or SDM.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or
manual for information on its operations and data
collection.
7-9
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376), or write:
HUMMER Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33177
Detroit, MI 48232-5177
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-11
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
7-12
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
A
Accessory Inflator ........................................... 5-76
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-18
Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-73
Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-37
Additional Program Information ........................... 7-8
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-101
Add-On Equipment .......................................... 4-72
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) ...... 3-65, 3-77
After Off-Road Driving ..................................... 4-41
Air Bag
Off Light ..................................................... 3-30
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-28
Air Bag System .............................................. 1-61
Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-73
Air Bag Off Switch ....................................... 1-68
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-65
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-72
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-65
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? ...... 1-66
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-65
Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-63
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-19
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-23
Air Suspension ............................................... 4-74
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-48
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System ......................... 2-25
AM ............................................................... 3-90
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-92
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ............................ 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-34
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-92
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-95
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-99
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-93
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-95
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-99
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-98
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-99
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-100
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-95
Approaching a Hill .......................................... 4-32
Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-18
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-62
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-89
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-90
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-92
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-92
Chime Level Adjustment ............................... 3-92
Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-92
Navigation/Radio System .............................. 3-86
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-63
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-74
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................ 3-87
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-62
1
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
Automatic Climate Control System .....................
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation ..................
Automatic Headlamp System ............................
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
3-88
3-90
3-19
2-35
3-14
5-21
2-22
B
Backing Up .................................................... 4-82
Battery .......................................................... 5-42
BATTERY NOT CHARGING ............................. 3-57
Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-5
Battery Run-Down Protection ............................ 3-17
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-48
Before You Go Off-Roading .............................. 4-17
Bench Seat, Split (60/40) ................................... 1-8
Brake
Parking ...................................................... 2-29
System Warning Light .................................. 3-33
Brake Adjustment ............................................ 5-42
Brake and Throttle Operation Techniques for
Off-Road Driving .......................................... 4-27
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-38
Brake Pedal Travel ......................................... 5-42
2
Brake Wear ................................................... 5-41
Brakes .......................................................... 5-38
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-9
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-18
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-52
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-57
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 5-54
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-53
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52
Headlamps ................................................. 5-52
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-58
Roof Marker Lamps ..................................... 5-55
Sidemarker Lamps ....................................... 5-54
Taillamps .................................................... 5-57
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-71
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
Canada – Customer Assistance .......................... 7-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Canadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-7
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-111
Carbon Monoxide ................... 4-52, 4-75, 2-13, 2-33
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-95
Your Cassette Tape Player ............................ 3-90
Care of (cont.)
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-92
Your CDs ................................................... 3-92
Cargo Area Door Lock Switch ............................ 2-8
Cargo Tie Downs ............................................ 2-49
Cassette Tape Messages ................................. 3-71
CD Adapter Kits ............................................. 3-71
CD Messages ........................................ 3-74, 3-86
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-46
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-57
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................ 5-105
Center Overhead Console ................................ 2-46
Center Roof Marker Lamps .............................. 5-56
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-75
CHANGE ENGINE OIL .................................... 3-56
Charging System Light .................................... 3-32
Check Engine Light ......................................... 3-38
CHECK OIL LEVEL ......................................... 3-56
CHECK WASHER FLUID ................................. 3-59
Checking Brake Fluid ...................................... 5-39
Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-26
Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-14
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................... 1-73
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-99
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-44
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-40
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-50
Child Restraints (cont.)
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ..................................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ...........................................
Top Strap ...................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Chime Level Adjustment ..................................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Inside of Your Vehicle ..................................
Outside of Your Vehicle ................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .....
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .......................
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet ....................................
Cleaning Glass Surfaces ..................................
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components .................
Cleaning Leather ............................................
Cleaning the Mirror .........................................
Cleaning the Speaker Covers ...........................
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ...........
Cleaning the Video Screen ...............................
1-38
1-52
1-53
1-55
1-48
1-49
1-47
3-92
3-18
5-93
5-95
5-99
5-95
5-98
5-96
5-93
5-94
5-94
5-93
2-37
5-94
5-94
3-92
3
Cleaning the Windshield, Backglass and Wiper
Blades ....................................................... 5-97
Cleaning Tires ................................................ 5-98
Cleaning Vinyl ................................................ 5-93
Cleaning Wood Panels .................................... 5-94
Climate Control System
Automatic ................................................... 3-19
Climate Controls Personalization .................... 3-25
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-25
Compass Calibration ....................................... 2-35
Compass Operation ......................................... 2-35
Compass Variance .......................................... 2-36
Content Theft-Deferrent .................................... 2-16
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-6
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-35
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-21
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-27
Cooling System .............................................. 5-30
Corner Roof Marker Lamps .............................. 5-55
Crossing Obstacles ......................................... 4-30
Cruise Control .................................................. 3-9
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-42
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-12
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ....................................................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
4
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ............................................ 7-10
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-5
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-15
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Defogging and Defrosting ................................. 3-24
Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-9
Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-66
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-66
Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-17
Door
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9
Locks .......................................................... 2-7
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-22
DRIVER DOOR AJAR ..................................... 3-60
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-44
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-44
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-56
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-41
City ........................................................... 4-46
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Freeway ..................................................... 4-47
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-50
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-43
Off-Road .................................................... 4-17
Winter ........................................................ 4-52
Driving Across an Incline .................................. 4-36
Driving Downhill .............................................. 4-35
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice .................... 4-39
Driving in Water .............................................. 4-40
Driving On Grades .......................................... 4-83
Driving on Off-Road Hills ................................. 4-31
Driving on Snow or Ice .................................... 4-52
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-45
Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-45
Driving Uphill .................................................. 4-32
Driving with a Trailer ....................................... 4-81
E
Easy Exit Seat ............................................... 2-53
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-101
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-102
Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-102
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-102
Electronically Controlled Air Suspension System .... 4-74
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs ................................................... 3-40
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-19
Battery ....................................................... 5-42
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-38
Coolant ...................................................... 5-24
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-21
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-35
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-15
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-33
Fan Noise .................................................. 5-35
Oil ............................................................. 5-14
Overheating ................................................ 5-27
Starting ...................................................... 2-20
ENGINE COOLANT HOT ................................. 3-57
Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-17
5
ENGINE OVERHEATED .................................. 3-57
Entering or Exiting the Third Row Seats .............. 1-7
Entry/Exit Lighting ........................................... 3-17
Environmental Concerns .................................. 4-23
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons .............................. 2-45
Event Data Records (EDR) ................................ 7-9
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-37
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-13
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-19
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station ....... 3-66, 3-78
Finding a Station .................................... 3-64, 3-75
Finish Care .................................................... 5-96
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-99
First Aid Kit and Tool Kit .................................. 4-59
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-92
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-7
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-78
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-79
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-21
Power Steering ........................................... 5-36
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-37
FM ............................................................... 3-90
Folding the Seatback ....................................... 1-10
Folding the Seatbacks ....................................... 1-8
6
Following Distance .......................................... 4-82
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-51
Front Receiver ................................................ 4-60
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-43
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-43
Fuel Information Button .................................... 3-47
FUEL LEVEL LOW ......................................... 3-58
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-102
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-102
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature .........................
Fuel ..........................................................
Oil Pressure ...............................................
Speedometer ..............................................
Tachometer .................................................
Transmission Temperature .............................
Voltmeter Gage ...........................................
3-35
3-43
3-41
3-28
3-28
3-36
3-32
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-42
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Gate Operator and Canadian Programming ........ 2-44
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving ................ 4-28
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-45
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities .................................................... 7-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-4
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-6
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-7
Headlamps .................................................... 5-52
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-52
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 5-54
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-53
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52
Roof Marker Lamps ..................................... 5-55
Sidemarker Lamps ....................................... 5-54
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4
Heating ......................................................... 3-24
High Mobility Characteristics ............................. 4-24
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-49
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-50
Hitches .......................................................... 4-80
HomeLink® Transmitter .................................... 2-42
HomeLink® Transmitter, Programming ................ 2-42
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-10
Horn ............................................................... 3-5
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank ...... 5-32
How to Add Fluid ............................................ 5-23
How to Check Lubricant ................................... 5-50
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-36
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-21
Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-45
I
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ..........
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ...............
If the Light is Flashing .....................................
If the Light Is On Steady .................................
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard .........................
If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow .......
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer .....................
Ignition Positions .............................................
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors .........................
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ...............
Inflation - Tire Pressure ...................................
5-29
5-28
3-39
3-39
4-54
4-56
4-76
2-19
2-16
1-40
5-68
7
Instrument Panel
Cluster ....................................................... 3-27
Overview ..................................................... 3-2
Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-16
Instrument Panel Fuse Block .......................... 5-103
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-16
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-43
K
KEYFOB X BATTERY LOW ............................. 3-61
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
L
Lamps
Exterior ......................................................
Interior .......................................................
Lamps On Reminder .......................................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ...........................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................
8
3-13
3-16
3-14
1-22
1-50
1-52
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running ... 2-31
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR ................................ 3-61
Liftgate .......................................................... 2-13
Light
Air Bag Off ................................................. 3-30
Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-28
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-34
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-33
Charging System ......................................... 3-32
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-42
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-43
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-38
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-28
Security ..................................................... 3-42
Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 3-42
Traction Off ................................................ 3-35
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-67
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving .......... 4-22
Locking Rear Axle ........................................... 4-11
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-12
Locks
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9
Door ........................................................... 2-7
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12
Power Door .................................................. 2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-16
LOW COOLANT LEVEL .................................. 3-57
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-43
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-46
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-3
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-10
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-8
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-14
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using Your ................................................... 6-3
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-84
Making Turns ................................................. 4-82
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-38
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-5
Memory Seat ................................................. 2-51
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-56
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/
Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) – Customer Assistance ....................... 7-4
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass
and Temperature Display ........................... 2-34
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb
View Assist ............................................. 2-39
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-38
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-39
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-37
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
Navigation/Radio System .................................. 3-86
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-18
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-14
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-28
Off-Road Driving ............................................. 4-17
Off-Road Lamps ............................................. 3-16
9
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-14
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-14
Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-41
OIL LIFE RESET ............................................ 3-56
OIL PRESSURE LOW ..................................... 3-56
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-38
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar® Personal Calling ................................. 2-41
OnStar® Services ............................................ 2-40
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 2-41
OnStar® System ............................................. 2-40
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-5
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-25
Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror with Curb View
Assist ..................................................... 2-39
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-38
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-39
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-37
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ... 5-28
Overload and Overheat Protection ..................... 4-74
Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-4
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Owner’s Information ........................................ 7-11
10
P
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-30
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-32
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-29
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-32
Parking on Hills .............................................. 4-83
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR .............................. 3-61
Passing ................................................. 4-14, 4-82
Passlock® ...................................................... 2-18
Personalization Button ..................................... 3-48
Personalization, Climate Controls ...................... 3-25
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-7
Playing a Cassette Tape .................................. 3-69
Playing a CD ......................................... 3-72, 3-80
Playing a Specific Loaded CD .......................... 3-82
Playing the Radio ................................... 3-63, 3-74
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-18
Door Locks .................................................. 2-8
Electrical System ....................................... 5-102
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-3
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-36
Windows .................................................... 2-15
Power Steering ............................................... 4-12
Power Winch Platform (If Equipped) .................. 4-62
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 2-9
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter ........... 2-42
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-21
R
Radio Data System (RDS) ....................... 3-66,
Radio Messages .............................................
Radios ..........................................................
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Navigation/Radio System ..............................
Radio with Cassette and CD .........................
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................
Rear Seat Audio ..........................................
Setting the Time ..........................................
Theft-Deterrent ............................................
Understanding Reception ..............................
RDS Messages ...................................... 3-68,
3-77
3-69
3-62
3-90
3-92
3-92
3-86
3-63
3-74
3-87
3-62
3-88
3-90
3-79
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-17
REAR ACCESS OPEN .................................... 3-61
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-50
Locking ...................................................... 4-11
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-11
Rear Heated Seats ........................................... 1-8
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-34
Rear Seat Armrest .......................................... 2-49
Rear Seat Audio Controls ................................. 3-87
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................... 3-87
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-7
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-30
Rear Window Defogger .................................... 3-24
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass and Temperature Display ................ 2-34
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-5
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-65
REDUCED ENGINE POWER ........................... 3-57
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-4
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-83
Removing the Seat ......................................... 1-13
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-80
REPLACE LIFTGATE FUSE ............................. 3-61
11
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-58
Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-42
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash ..... 1-74
Replacing the Seat ......................................... 1-15
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-10
General Motors ........................................... 7-10
United States Government ............................ 7-10
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button ....... 2-45
Resetting Defaults ........................................... 2-45
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-73
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-74
Resynchronization ............................................. 2-6
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-19
Returning the Seat to an Upright Position ........... 1-12
Returning the Seats to an Upright Position ........... 1-9
Ride Height, Selectable Extended Rear Ride ...... 4-73
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-30
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR .............................. 3-61
Roadside Assistance Program ............................ 7-5
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-56
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-15
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-33
12
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-28
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-95
Driver Position ............................................ 1-22
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-21
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-21
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults ...................................... 1-34
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-30
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-30
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-37
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-29
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-16
Safety Chains ................................................. 4-80
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scanning the Terrain ....................................... 4-29
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
60/40 Split Bench Seat .................................. 1-8
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-6
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4
Heated Seats, Rear ....................................... 1-8
Seats (cont.)
Memory ..................................................... 2-51
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-3
Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-7
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-5
Third Row Seat ........................................... 1-10
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-52
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-53
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-55
Security Light ................................................. 3-42
Security While You Travel .................................. 7-5
Select Button ................................................. 3-55
Selectable Extended Rear Ride Height ............... 4-73
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-38
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11
SERVICE 4WD ............................................... 3-58
SERVICE AIR BAG ......................................... 3-58
SERVICE AIR SUSPENSION ........................... 3-58
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM ............................. 3-58
Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-11
Service Manuals ............................................. 7-11
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ............ 1-72
Setting Preset PTYs ........................................ 3-79
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only) ....................... 3-67
Setting Preset Stations ............................ 3-64, 3-76
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-62
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .................. 3-65, 3-76
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-98
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-30
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-32
Skidding ........................................................ 4-16
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-45
Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-92
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-111
Speedometer .................................................. 3-28
Split Bench Seat (60/40) .................................... 1-8
Stalling on an Incline ....................................... 4-38
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-20
Steering ........................................................ 4-12
Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-13
Steering Tips .................................................. 4-12
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-89
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-5
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-46
Center Overhead Console ............................. 2-46
Glove Box .................................................. 2-45
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-46
Rear Seat Armrest ....................................... 2-49
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-90
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-56
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-16
13
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-50
Suspension .................................................... 4-74
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-28
Taillamps ....................................................... 5-57
Temperature Display ........................................ 2-35
Testing the Alarm ............................................ 2-17
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-88
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-16
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-16
Passlock® ................................................... 2-18
Third Row Seat .............................................. 1-10
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP ...................................... 3-59
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-5
Tilting the Seat ............................................... 1-11
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................... 5-60
Tire Size ....................................................... 5-64
Tire Terminology and Definitions ........................ 5-65
Tires ............................................................. 5-60
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-71
Chains ....................................................... 5-75
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-79
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-78
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-68
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-69
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-92
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-72
14
Tires (cont.)
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-73
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-74
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-70
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-21
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-48
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-49
Torque Lock ................................................... 2-32
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-79
Tow/Haul Mode ............................................... 2-25
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................... 3-42
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-65
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-75
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-65
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-9
Off Light ..................................................... 3-35
TRACTION ACTIVE ........................................ 3-59
Trailer Recommendations ................................. 4-75
Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-81
Trailer Wiring Harness ..................................... 4-84
TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE ............................. 3-60
Transfer Case ................................................ 5-48
Transfer Case Buttons ..................................... 2-25
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-21
Temperature Gage ....................................... 3-36
TRANSMISSION HOT ..................................... 3-59
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-22
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit
Repair Manual ............................................ 7-11
Transportation Options ...................................... 7-7
Traveling to Remote Areas ............................... 4-23
Trip Information Button .................................... 3-45
Turn and Lane Change Signals .......................... 3-6
TURN SIGNAL ON ......................................... 3-58
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-6
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-82
U
Underhood Fuse Block ................................... 5-106
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-90
Unfolding the Seatback .................................... 1-10
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-72
United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-4
Used Replacement Wheels .............................. 5-75
Using HomeLink® ........................................... 2-44
Using Song List Mode ..................................... 3-84
Using the Recovery Loops ............................... 4-57
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-6
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Vehicle (cont.)
Loading ...................................................... 4-67
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Records ..... 7-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-101
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-101
Vehicle Personalization
Memory Seat .............................................. 2-51
Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-42
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-25
Visors ........................................................... 2-16
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-32
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-26
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-56
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-4
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-5
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-95
Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-78
Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-79
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-15
What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-18
15
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..........................
Replacement ...............................................
When to Add Engine Oil ..................................
When to Change Engine Oil (GM Oil Life
System) .....................................................
When to Check Lubricant .................................
When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................
When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on
a Hill .........................................................
Where to Put the Restraint ...............................
Why Safety Belts Work ....................................
Windows .......................................................
16
5-73
5-74
5-15
5-17
5-50
5-36
4-84
1-47
1-18
2-14
Power ........................................................ 2-15
Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-8
Fluid .......................................................... 5-37
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-59
Fuses ...................................................... 5-102
Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-8
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-52
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising